Home
        the manual
         Contents
1.          Page 93 of 206       Defines the centre    CentreOfGravity  0 0m  1 8m  0 0m      CentreOfGravity   0 0ft  5 0ft  0 0ft                           CentreOfGravity   x  y  z   of gravity of a   As per vehicle Da  WAS locomotive or Distance specs existing NB  can be left out if not known  wagon  Curve Friction  ane oe   ORTSRigidWheelBase  5ft 6in    ORTA RIR A WERIBASE 1  WAG bie ied Distance a oes ORTSRigidWheelBase   3 37m    p NB  can be left out if not known  Locomotive Gearing  Only required if locomotive is geared   ORTSSteamGearRatio  a  b   ENG kania of ears Value Asperloco spes New ORTSSteamGearRatio   2 55  0 0    ORTSSteamMaxGearPistonRate   x   ENG Max speed of valne aniy    AS per lace Spirs New ORTSSteamMaxGearPistonRate   650    piston in ft min  Indicates whether  the locomotive 3  ORI ssteanGeaniype A  ENG has fixed gearing Fixed  Select As per loco specs New OTs scombest ype  FIXA      or selectable                   gearing  Locomotive Performance Adjustments  Optional only   to be used by experienced modellers   Multiplication   i  aa i  ORTSBoilerEavporationRate   15 0    ORTSBoilerEavporationRate   x   ENG adiustin Factor As per loco specs New  i J g    between 10  15  NB  leave out if not used  maximum boiler  steam output  Tabular input X     steam  describing the produced in  f coal       coal    ORTSBurrRate   x  y   ENG TALE Or COR bs  y     coa As per loco specs   New NB  leave out if not used       combusted to the  rate of steam       comb
2.     14 3 Discrete Triggers  Unlike MSTS  OR does not restrict the operation of some discrete triggers related to locomotives  to the cabview related  sms file  usually named    cab sms file   On OR they are all also active in  the file related to the external view  usually named    eng sms file      OR manages following MSTS discrete triggers    DynamicBrakelncrease  currently not managed   DynamicBrakeOff   SanderOn   SanderOff   WiperOn   WiperOff   HornOn    ONO WP    Page 182 of 206    9  10  11  12  13  14  15  16  17  18  20  21  22  27  28  30  31  32  33  34  36  37  38  39  41  42  43  44  45  46  47  48  54  56  57  58  59  60  61  62  63    HornOff   BellOn   BellOff   CompressorOn   CompressorOff  TrainBrakePressurelncrease  ReverserChange   ThrottleChange   TrainBrakeChange  EngineBrakeChange  DynamicBrakeChange  EngineBrakePressurelncrease  EngineBrakePressureDecrease  SteamEjector2On  SteamEjector2Off   SteamEjector1 On   SteamEjector1 Off   DamperChange   BlowerChange  CylinderCocksToggle  FireboxDoorChange  LightSwitchToggle  WaterScoopDown  currently not managed   WaterScoopUp  currently not managed   FireboxDoorClose  SteamSafetyValveOn  SteamSafetyValveOff  SteamHeatChange  currently not managed    PantographiUp   Pantographi Down   Pantograph1 Toggle  currently not managed   VigilanceAlarmReset  TrainBrakePressureDecrease  VigilanceAlarmOn  VigilanceAlarmOff   Couple   CoupleB  currently not managed   CoupleC  currently not managed   Uncouple   UncoupleB 
3.     USER3   copy middle approach      USER4   no check block for lower        float clearstate   float setstate   float diststate   float adiststate   float nextstate   float routestate   float blockstate     blockstate   0    clearstate   0    routestate   0    setstate   0    nextstate   next_sig_Ir SIGFN_NORMAL    diststate   next_sig_Ir SIGFN_DISTANCE    adiststate   diststate     if  diststate     SIGASP_CLEAR_1        diststate   SIGASP_CLEAR_2     Page 144 of 206       if  diststate     SIGASP_APPROACH_1     diststate   SIGASP_APPROACH_ 3           get block state  if  lenabled        clearstate    1        if  block_state        BLOCK_JN_OBSTRUCTED        clearstate    1      if  block_state       BLOCK_OCCUPIED     blockstate    1             check if distant indicates correct route  if  diststate     SIGASP_STOP                top route  state   SIGASP_STOP     clearstate    1     if  blockstate    0  amp  amp  clearstate    0  amp  amp  diststate     SIGASP_CLEAR_ 2      aspect selection for top route  not shown        middle route  if  blockstate    0  amp  amp  clearstate    0  amp  amp  diststate     SIGASP_APPROACH_3        aspect selection for middle route  not shown        lower route  if  blockstate    0  amp  amp  clearstate    0  amp  amp  diststate     SIGASP_RESTRICTING        if  Approach_Control_Speed Approach_Control_Req_Position  Approach_Control_Req_Speed    state   SIGASP_RESTRICTING           Get draw state  draw_state   def_draw_state  state    1
4.    0 0 mph   0 0    0 Forward   0    Apply 30   Va0 inHg EOT IBP 12  0     70  82 7 kg h    Boiler pressure 359 inHg    Fuel levels 100  coall 100  water    FPS 70       The default firing setting is automatic fireman  If manual firing is engaged  with Ctlr F   then  additional information is included     X2802  12 04 34  0 0 mph    Version  Time  Speed  Gradient 0 0    Direction 0 Forward   Throttle 0    Train brake Apply 30   V40 inHg EOT IBH  Engine brake 0      Steam usage 206 2 kg h   Boiler pressure 360 inHg   Boiler water levely 91   safejrange    Boiler Water level     89   absolute     Fire mass 100    Fuel levels 100  coali 100  water    FPS 63       7 4 4 Multiplayer     Additional Information   If a multiplayer session is active  the following additional information is shown  the actual status of  the player  dispatcher  helper or client   the number of players connected and the list of trains with  their distances from the train of the player viewing the computer     7 4 5 Compass Window   Open Rails software displays a compass that provides Smee   a heading based on the camera   s direction together Samman x  with its latitude and longitude  Compass    To activate the compass window press the O  zero   key  To deactivate the compass window  press the 0     zero  key a second time     at  32 217930 Lon     130 696300         Page 38 of 206    7 4 6 F1 Information Monitor  The F1 key displays the following set of panels in a tabbed format  selected by clicking wit
5.    Data logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater   Experimental    IV Advanced adhesion model  10     Adhesion moving average filter size  IV Break couplers  J    Curve dependent resistance  J    Curve dependent speed limit  J    Tunnel dependent resistance    J    Override non electrifiedroute line voltage    IV Steam locomotive hot start       6 4 1 Advanced adhesion model  OR supports two adhesion models  the basic one is similar to the one used by MSTS  while the  advanced one is based on a model more similar to reality     For more information read the section on    Adhesion Models    later in this manual     6 4 2 Adhesion moving average filter size  The computations related to adhesion are passed through a moving average filter  Higher values  cause smoother operation  but also less responsiveness  10 is the default filter size     6 4 3 Break couplers  When this option is selected  if the force on a coupler is higher than the threshold set in the  eng  file  the coupler breaks and the train is divided into two parts     Page 22 of 206    6 4 4 Curve dependent resistance   When this option is selected  resistance to train motion is influenced by the radius of the curve on  which the train is running  This option is described in detail here  theory  and also here  OR  application     6 4 5 Curve dependent speed limit   When this option is selected  OR computes whether the train is running too fast on curves  and if  so a warning message is logged and displayed on the mon
6.    Some commands can also be set in the  note row  in which case they apply from the start of the  train  These commands are indicated below by an asterisk     behind the command name    The commands  hold and  nosignalwait can also be set as location commands     hold   nohold and  forcehold  If  hold is set  it defines that the exit signal for that location must be held at danger up to 2  minutes before train departure     An exit signal is allocated to a platform if this signal is beyond the end platform marker  in the  direction of travel   but is still within the same track node   so there must not be any points  etc  between the platform marker and the signal    By default  the signal will not be held    If set per location  it will apply to all trains  but can be overridden for any specific train by  defining  nohold in that train s column    If set per train  it will apply to that train only      forcehold will set the first signal beyond the platform as the  hold  signal  even if this signal is  not allocated to the platform as exit signal  This can be useful at locations with complex layout  where signals are not directly at the platform ends  but not holding the signals could lead to  delay to other trains      callon  This will allow a train to    call on  into a platform occupied by another train     For full details  see the discussion above on the relationship between signalling and  timetable      connect  Syntax    connect  lt train gt   maxdelay n  hold h   
7.    last column        0   2   3   5   0   0   5   0   2   3    US2EmpLoggerCar    US2Freight6  US2Freight6    US2BNSFCar  US2FCarRF2    US2EmpLoggerCar  US2BNSFCar  US2FCarRF2  US2Freight6  US2Freight6    Work Orders  Location  Whitefish Siding 1  Whitefish Siding 3    Whitefish Siding 5    Whitefish Siding 8          Procedures     basic instructions for driving trains in Open Rails     7 4 7 F4 Track Monitor    Status  A    This window  which is displayed by pressing F4  has two different layouts according the the train   s  control mode     Auto Signal    mode     Manual    mode or    Explorer    mode  it is strongly suggested to  follow the link and read the related paragraph      Auto Signal or Auto mode is the default mode when running activities or timetables     There are however two main cases where you must switch to    Manual    mode by pressing Ctrl M     To switch to manual mode press Ctrl M when the train is stopped     when the activity requires shunting without a predefined path    when the train runs out of control due to SPAD     Signal Passed At Danger    or passing  a red signal  or exits the predefined path by error  If such situations occur you will  usually get an emergency stop  To reset the emergency stop and then move to  correct the error  you must first switch to Manual mode     You can return to auto mode by pressing Ctrl M again when the head of the train is again on the  correct path  with no SPAD situation  In standard situations you can also r
8.    open rails    The evolutionary train simulator linking  MSTS compatibility to top range features    Welcome to the future of rail simulation         Reference Manual  Version 1 0    Revised May 18  2015    Contents     1 Legalise a aaa aa Eaa E aE a Eaa aa EA EAE AA Uren ERREA 1  2 New in This Release ercicciscsicecerecsnecenestiecunenssenenneisuiusonsineendeatnmieatiecmeeinnuseieenereeaieewtaasienesmaddemenertiee 2  Snrod  ction as nee et ee st eee eae eee eee 3  4 MSTS File Format Gompanowity accel ce esataeevenat ceetetaniastee damiaras eediaenaidnattnasdesl naucanbiedtee deatraaceauas 6  Getting Stated eer a e T eae wine he ete ee ie eee enes 9  6 Open Ralls Options isseire iinis e E E REA EERO NEUKE EEEE AEE A ENEE E 13  BO EIN TAN cote a E E E E E 34  8 Open Rails Physics i sccenctecenscesenepecarucen ans sechoiesengntretetstocetinng ares cis eneiocenareiniieeeioenerdienrmieceateretmienanes 70  9 Further Open Rails Rolling  Stock Features virccicetssassscisterseccatenssetebensiprenanasciasenmneceneenegsanaseneoarmeunes 121  10 Open Rails Train Operation siactie cs cctrce etic ic eh me caacness cetera secenwk ais eal one certs os ree hetnetdeaataneuteende 122  11 Timetable Mode perenne eee ey Rene ee re er mere Pe ene ee ee eee ee eee oer reer eee es 151  12 Oper Rails  Multi Player sccivicesashimnerdsluba denial nanna a anara a A EEVEE slob ieneceeeimeangealenene  171  13 Multi Player  Setting up a Server from Your Own Computer          ssssssssesseessserererrnrnessr
9.    varisie2  22  EK 7 ipa  5 N A i t   none   cue  topp ineShot  file  the list of all sound streams is displayed  as      3 bx 94  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0     RETE 95  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  well as their state  On the left the value of the       18347 EE ee ee  analog sound variables is displayed for the                oe ERE  selected  sms file  The volume refers to the first   ee l    Sound cache        none   cu    copped OneSho     stream of the selected sound file  es 101  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  ee 102  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  Active and inactive sounds toggle passing from   prs eae  i i i      105  none   cue  0  Stopped Release 0  internal to external views and vice versa   r aaah ah  107  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0          109  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0 _  110  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  111  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  112  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  113  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  114  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  115  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  116 tictac wav  cue  0  Playing Loop 1  117  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  118  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0  119  none   cue  0  Stopped OneShot 0                   clear_ex sms  1      signal sms  1      signal sms  1   H     signal sms  1                    Page 68 of 206    7 16 OpenRailsLog txt Log file  When the    Logging    option in the main window is checked  a log file named OpenRailsLog txt file  is generated  
10.    where      is the version number of the  Open Rails release you are having problems with  and       is a quick description of the problem  you are having  This format aids the developers in getting a quick idea of the issue being reported     The first post in this newly started topic should give further information on your problem  Start out  with exactly what problem you are getting  describing it in narrative and supplementing this  description with screenshots  error messages produced by Open Rails  and so on     Next give a clear indication of the content you were using  that is  Route  Activity  Path  Consist   Locomotive and Rolling Stock  whatever is applicable   whether it is freeware or payware  what the  exact name of the downloaded package was and where it can be obtained  Of course  posting a  download link to a trustworthy site or directly attaching files to the post also is OK     Continue with an exact description of what you were doing when the problem arose  this may  already be included in the first paragraph  if the problem is train operation related   Again   screenshots etc  can be helpful to better describe the situation     Page 195 of 206    Lastly  take a look at your desktop for a text    TXT  file entitled OpenRailsLog txt  Upload and  attach this file to the end of your post  This is very important as the log file contains all relevant  program data the user has no chance to ever see  and thus it is one of the most important sources  of informa
11.   9  It is also possible to animate the wipers  by inserting into the  s file an animation named  EXTERNALWIPERS 0 0    10  Gauges of solid type have to be named AMMETER 1 10 100  where the three numbers  indicate that this is the second ammeter  that it has a width 10mm  and a maximum length of  100mm  The color and direction orientation follow those defined in  cvf files     11  Digits for 3D cabs can now use custom ACE files  e g  name the part as  CLOCK 1 15 CLOCKS  This will draw the second clock with 15mm font dimension  with the  CLOCKS ACE file in CABVIEW3D containing the font  If no ace is specified  the default will be  used     Page 189 of 206    12  Mirrors and doors can be operated from 3D cabs  Names to be used are LEFTDOOR   RIGHTDOOR and MIRRORS     A demo trainset with a 3Dcab  that may be useful for developers  can be downloaded from           http    www tsimserver com Download Df11G3DCab  zip        15 3 2 A Practical Development Example For a Digital Speedometer  for content developers     Let s suppose you have to create a digital speedometer using a font with size 14     To explain it in  gmax  speak  you must have an object called  SPEEDOMETER   in the cab view  and it must be comprised of at least one face     As the sample cab has only one digital speedometer  it can be named SPEEDOMETER_0_14     The number 0 indicates that this is the first soeedometer gauge in the cab and the number 14  indicates the size of the font to display  Note that an unders
12.   and replacement  of an earlier experimental option   Always use    highest level of detail   The new option allows you to increase or reduce the level of detail  generally shown independently of the viewing distance and world object density     6 10 17 Adhesion proportional to rain snow fog  When this option is selected  adhesion becomes dependent on the intensity of rain and snow and  the density of fog  Intensities and density can be modified at runtime by the player     6 10 18 Adhesion factor random change  This factor randomizes the adhesion factor corrector by the entered percentage  The higher the  value  the higher the adhesion variations     Page 33 of 206    7 Driving a Train    7 1 Game Loading  Once you have pressed    Start     Open Rails loads and processes all the data needed to run the  game  During this phase  the route   s splash screen is shown  If the same session was loaded  previously  a bar showing loading progress is shown at the bottom of the display  During loading  if  logging is selected  the log file OpenRailsLog txt will already begin storing data     7 2 Entering the Simulation   At the end of the loading phase  you are in the cab of the train you will drive  Note  some newer  locomotives have experimental 3D cabs   if no cab interior display appears  then type Alt 1 to  display the cab interior   Depending on the configuration of the activity  in case of activity mode    your train will be in motion or stopped  In this second case  if the tra
13.   b h  gt     qBumn 243 Ib h Comb 5 3 lbs  t2    m    0 gal uk  h emp Inj 0 gal uk  h temp 2 2 0 F    l    ny 1  000    Stoker False       nental   Slip Monitor        As can be seen from this screenshot related to a fictitious train with a diesel  an electric and a    Page 60 of 206    steam loco  information about diesel and electric locomotives is contained on a single line  while  information about steam locomotives includes a large set of parameters  which shows the  sophistication of OR s steam physics     In the bottom part of this HUD two moving graphs show the evolution in time of the throttle value  and of the power of the player locomotive  the one where the active cab resides      Throttle       7 15 3 Extended HUD for Brake Information    BRAKE INFORMATION   Main reservoir 134 psi   Car Type BrkCyl BrkPipe AuxRes ErgRes MRPipe RetValve TripleValve Handbrk Conn AnglCock BleedOff  0 0 1P 35 psi 64 psi 84 psi 84 psi Emergency F A  B    A  B    A  B     0 1 1P 35 psi 64 psi 84 psi 84 psi Emergency     32884   0 1P 0 psi 63 psi 63 psi 63 psi Release 0      32884   1 1P 0 psi 63 psi 63 psi 63 psi Release 0    A  B           32884   2 1P 0 psi 63 psi 63 psi 63 psi Release 0  A  B     This extended HUD display includes all the information of the basic HUD plus Brake status  information  Information is shown for all cars  The first number shows the car UiD in the train  as  found in the consist file or the activity file  the following alphanumeric string shows the brake  
14.   basis with a   O O   custom dll Simulator State contains   isco Appcsianes   currently running activity      date  time  season  weather    tdb information    and or Loco Physics  modules can be  replaced on a    per  wagon    basis       position and speed of all trains     alignment of tumouts  switches      indication of all signals     some critical animation states  i e   loco lights on or off  bell is  ringing  pan is up or down                 Multiple Possible    Tower  Operator    Viewer    2D Track  Schematic  Viewer       Save and restore  games by saving  and restoring  simulator game  state              el    Network  interface keeps  simulator state in  sync among   multiple players             20 2 Open Rails Game Engine    The Open Rails software is built on Microsofts XNA game platform using XNA Framework 3 1 and   NET Framework 3 5 SP1  Source code is developed in Microsoft s Visual C  programming    language     Page 199 of 206    The XNA Framework is based on the native implementation of  NET Compact Framework for Xbox  360 development and  NET Framework on Windows  It includes an extensive set of class libraries   specific to game development  to promote maximum code reuse across target platforms  The  framework runs on a version of the Common Language Runtime that is optimized for gaming to  provide a managed execution environment  The runtime is available for Windows XP  Windows  Vista  Windows 7  Windows 8  and Xbox 360  Since XNA games are written f
15.   but with newer video cards they   re much  less important than in the early days of MSTS  What does remain important to both environments  are Draw Calls     A Draw Call occurs when the CPU sends a block of data to the Video Card  Each model in view   plus terrain  will evoke one or more Draw Calls per frame  i e   a frame rate of 60 second means all  of the draw calls needed to display a scene are repeated 60 times a second   Given the large  number of models displayed in any scene and a reasonable frame rate  the total number of Draw  Calls per second creates a very large demand on the CPU  Open Rails software will adjust the  frame rate according to the number of required Draw Calls  For example  if your CPU can handle  60 000 Draw Calls per second and the scene in view requires 1000 Draw Calls  your frame rate  per second will be 60  For the same CPU  if the scene requires 2000 Draw Calls  your frame rate  per second will be 30  Newer design   faster CPU   s can do more Draw Calls per second than older  design   slower CPU s     Generally speaking  each Draw Call sends one or more polygon meshes for each occurrence of a  texture file for a model  and usually more when there are multiple material types   What this means  in practice is if you have a model that uses two texture files and there are three instances of that  model in view there will be six draw calls     once for each of the models  3 in view  times once for  each texture file  2 files used   results in six 
16.   eng file to determine if the braking physics uses passenger or freight  standards  self lapping or not  This is controlled within the Options menu as shown in General  Options above     Selecting Graduated Release Air Brakes in Menu  gt  Options allows partial release of the brakes   Some 26C brake valves have a cut off valve that has three positions  passenger  freight and cut   out  Checked is equivalent to passenger standard and unchecked is equivalent to freight standard     The Graduated Release Air Brakes option controls two different features  If the train brake  controller has a self lapping notch and the Graduated Release Air Brakes box is checked  then  the amount of brake pressure can be adjusted up or down by changing the control in this notch  If  the Graduated Release Air Brakes option is not checked  then the brakes can only be increased  in this notch and one of the release positions is required to release the brakes     Another capability controlled by the Graduated Release Air Brakes checkbox is the behavior of  the brakes on each car in the train  If the Graduated Release Air Brakes box is checked  then the  brake cylinder pressure is regulated to keep it proportional to the difference between the  emergency reservoir pressure and the brake pipe pressure  If the Graduated Release Air Brakes  box is not checked and the brake pipe pressure rises above the auxiliary reservoir pressure  then  the brake cylinder pressure is released completely at a rate determ
17.   locomotive controlled  as desired  by the reverser  For economical use of steam  it is also  desirable to operate at the lowest cut off values as possible  so the reverser should be operated at  low values  especially running at high speeds     When running a steam locomotive keep an eye on the following key parameters in the Heads up  Display  HUD     F5  as they will give the driver an indication of the current status and performance  of the locomotive with regard to the heat conversion  Boiler and Fire  and work done  Cylinder   processes  Also bear in mind the above driving tips     Version X2802   Time 12 00 07   Speed 0 0 mph   Gradient 0 0    Direction 0 Forward   Throttle 0  fe   Train brake Apply 30   Va0 inHg EOT IBP 12    Engine brake 0    Steam usage 82 7 kg h   Boiler pressure 359 inHg   Fuel levels 100  coall 100  water    FPS 70       e Direction     indicates the setting on the reverser and the direction of travel  The value  is in per cent  so for example a value of 50 indicates that the cylinder is cutting off at  0 5 of the stroke     e Throttle     indicates the setting of the regulator in per cent   e Steam usage     these values represent the current steam usage per hour     e Boiler Pressure     this should be maintained close to the maximum working pressure  of the locomotive     e Boiler water level     indicates the level of water in the boiler  Under operation in  Automatic Fireman mode  the fireman should manage this     e Fuel levels    indicate
18.   plus the OR specific parts if any  or     this new file contains at its beginning only an    include    reference to the original file  plus the  modified parts and the OR specific parts  This does not apply to the Name   statement and  the Loco Description Information  where in any case the data in the base  eng file is retained     An example of an OR specific bc13ge70tonner eng file to be placed into the OpenRails subfolder  that uses the second possibility is as follows     include      bcl3ge70tonner eng    Wagon     MaxReleaseRate   2 17    MaxApplicationRate   3 37    MaxAuxilaryChargingRate    4    EmergencyResChargingRate    4     BrakePipeVolume    4     ORTSUnbalancedSuperElevation   3in    Engine     AirBrakeMainresvolume   16    MainResChargingRate    5    BrakePipeChargingRate   21    EngineBrakeReleaseRate   12 5    EngineBrakeApplicationRate   12 5    BrakePipeTimeFactor    00446    BrakeServiceTimeFactor   1 46    BrakeEmergencyTimeFactor    15    ORTSMaxTractiveForceCurves     O     00 50 0    el 2D      0 23125    38 23125  1 6984  2 3492  5 1397  10 698  20 349  50 140      25     0 46250   61 46250  1 27940                         Page 116 of 206    2 13969   5 5588   10 2794   20 1397   50 559    POM coma     0 69375    91 69375   2 31430   57 12572   10 6287   20 3143   50 1257    STA   0 92500   1 21 92500   5 22350   10 11175   20 5588   50   2235   3  2625     0 115625   Lod Ahk 5 6 25   5 34922   10 17461   20 8730   50 3492    who   0 138750   1 
19.   shows   of dynamic brake    e Engine   shows the running status of the engine   In case of a gear based engine  after the    Engine    line a    Gear    line appears  displaying the actual gear  N means no gear inserted     e FPS   Number of Frames rendered per second    Page 36 of 206    If the Autopilot is active  an additional line will be shown     An example of the basic HUD for Diesel locomotives     Version       7 4 2 Electric Locomotives     Additional information    For electric locomotives information about the pantograph state is also shown and whether the  locomotive has power  at least one pantograph raised  or not     Time  Speed  Gradient  Direction  hrottle  Train brake e EQ 7 6 bar BE 0 0 BP 7 6    Engine brake  ake  Up  Down  On    19       7 4 3 Steam Engine     Additional Information  When using a steam engine the following additional information is displayed in the HUD     e Steam Usage in lbs   h  based on entirely new physics code developed by the Open  Rails team  It is calculated by parsing the  eng file for the following parameters   number of cylinders  cylinder stroke  cylinder diameter  boiler volume  maximum boiler  pressure  maximum boiler output  exhaust limit  and basic steam usage     e Boiler pressure   e Water level     e Levels of coal and water in       Page 37 of 206    Version  Time   Speed  Gradient  Direction  Throttle   Train brake  Engine brake  Steam usage    An example of the basic HUD for Steam locomotives     X2802   12 00 07
20.   throttle  OR briefly shows a message near the bottom of the screen           This is helpful for operations that don t have visible feedback and also allows you to control the  train without being in the cab     Uncheck this option if you prefer to monitor your cab instruments and don t want to see these  messages     OR uses the same message scheme for system messages such as  Game saved  or  Replay  ended  but you cannot suppress these system messages     The player can change the braking capability of all of the cars in the simulation to include    These cause the brake cylinder on a car to retain some fixed pressure when the train  brakes are released  this causes the car to produce a constant braking force  If this option is not  checked  then brake retainers are only found on cars that have an appropriate entry  as described    in their  wag files     Page 15 of 206    6 1 7 Brake pipe charging rate   The Brake Pipe Charging Rate  PSl Second  value controls the charging rate of the main air  brake pipe  Increasing the value will reduce the time required to recharge the train  i e  when  releasing the brakes after a brake application   while decreasing the value will slow the charging  rate  See also the paragraphs on the OR implementation of the braking system     6 1 8 Language  OR is an internationalized package  It supports many languages  and others can be added by    following the instructions contained in the    Localization Manual    which can be found in the O
21.  0 Forward   0    Apply 30  V 0 inHg EOT BP 0  1800 BSI z   1608   b h   14 00 1b h b   0 00 m  0 pulling O pushing   OIN TOTKVY  qe 3    By default  the simulation pauses when the replay is exhausted  Use Pause replay at end on the    Saved Games window to change this     Page 58 of 206    Little can usefully be achieved by adjusting the train controls during replay  but the camera  controls can be freely adjusted  If changes are made  e g  switching to a different camera view or  zooming out   then replay of the camera controls is suspended while replay of the train controls  continues  The result is a bit like editing a video  To resume the replay of the camera controls  just  press Esc to open the Pause Menu and then choose Continue playing     A possible future development may be to edit the replay file to adjust times or to add messages to  provide a commentary  This would allow you to build demonstrations and tutorials     Replay is a feature which is unique to Open Rails  You can use it to make your own recordings  and Open Rails provides a way to exchange them with other players     7 14 1 Exporting and Importing Save Files  To export a Save file  use the command   Menu  gt  Options  gt  Resume  gt  Import export saves  gt  Export to Save Pack             m  Import and export saved games      Import Save Pack     Open Save Packs folder      Save Pack  shrtpass 2012 12 27 18 36 04  exported successfully   Save Pack folder contains 2 save packs    shrtpass 2012 11 10 1
22.  206    6 10 13 Location linked passing path processing   When this option is NOT selected  ORTS acts similarly to MSTS  That is  if two trains meet whose  paths share some track section in a station  but are both provided with passing paths as defined  with the MSTS Activity Editor  one of them will run through the passing path  therefore allowing the  meet  Passing paths in this case are only available to the trains whose path has passing paths     When this option is selected  ORTS makes available to all trains the main and the passing path of  the player train  Moreover  it takes into account the train length in selecting which path to assign to  a train in case of a meet     for content developers  A more detailed description of this feature can be found under Location   Linked Passing Path Processing in the chapter    Open Rails Train Operation        6 10 14 MSTS Environments  By default ORTS uses its own environment files and algorithms  e g  for night sky and for clouds     With this option selected  ORTS applies the MSTS environment files  This includes support of  Kosmos environments  even if the final effect may be different from the current MSTS one     6 10 15 Adhesion factor correction   The adhesion is multiplied by this percentage factor  Therefore lower values of the slider reduce  adhesion and cause more frequent wheel slips and therefore a more difficult  but more challenging  driving experience     6 10 16 Level of detail bias  This option is an expansion
23.  5 45   27 Ma 5 17 5 54  i 5 25 6 03   s 5 33 6 10    30 b 5 40 6 17     31 fo 5 45 6 22    32_ anaheis 5 49 6 26    33  Fu  eron 5 58 6 35     34  Buena park 6 04 6 41     35 _ Nonwall 6 12 6     36  commerce Metrolink 6 59    37_ rrack 3    Sforcehold ILA Union    45  Track 11    Sforcehoid LA Union  46 ck 12 Sforcehoid ILA Union 7 20    47 _ Giend    50  van Nuys Shold    52 _ chatsworth Shoki    53_ simivaliey    54  moorpark Shold    58  ventura    60  Santa Barbara    62      63 _ cuadalupe    64  crover Beach    65 bsan wis Obispo Shoid    66    isstab    Sforms MOS03  setstop   Satable    fout_path ST_LAX   MTQ Jout_path ST_LAXI2 MTO  fout_time 06 50 out_time 07 32  fin_path ST_MTO LAXB  fin_path ST_MTO _LAxa2  fin_time 17 22  forms MO605  in_time 16 05  forms MOs04  AR       11 7 What tools are available to develop a Timetable   It is recommended to use a powerful stand alone program  Excel is not required    called Timetable  Editor  It is included in the OR pack  and accessed from the    Tools    button on the OR menu      Page 170 of 206    12 Open Rails Multi Player    12 1 Goal  The Multi Player mode implemented in this stage is intended for friends to play OR together  each  assuming the role of a train engineer operating a train  There is a built in way to compose and  send text messages  but there is no built in tool for chatting  thus players are encouraged to use  Ventrillo  Skype  MSN  Yahoo  Teamspeak or other tools to communicate vocally     The current 
24.  600  20 700  50 1000  75 1200  100 1250    Diesel              the same as above or different       Jerk of ChangeDownRPMpS RPM   s   Maximal output power  Num of exhaust particles at IdleRPM  Num of exhaust particles at MaxRPM  Exhaust particle multiplier at transient  Exhaust color at steady state  Exhaust color at speeding up  Diesel engine power tab   RPM Power in Watts    Diesel engine fuel consumption tab  RPM Specific consumption g kWh    Diesel engine RPM vs  throttle tab  Throttle   Demanded RPM          8 2 1 5 Diesel Engine Speed Behavior    The engine speed is calculated based on the RPM rate of change and its rate of change  The  usual setting and the corresponding result is shown below  ChangeUpRPMpS means the slope of  RPM  RateOfChangeUpRPMpSS means how fast the RPM approaches the demanded RPM     Page 76 of 206    RPM Rates Example  1600  1400  1200  1000    3800  oc  600  ChangeUpRPMpS   75  400   ChangeDownRPMpsS   25  200  RateOfChangeUpRPMpSSs   5  i RateOfChangeDownRPMpSS   1    0 20 40 60 80 100 120    Time  s     Demanded RPM Real RPM          8 2 1 6 Fuel Consumption    Following the MSTS model  ORTS computes the diesel engine fuel consumption based on  eng  file parameters  The fuel flow and level are indicated by the HUD view  Final fuel consumption is  adjusted according to the current diesel power output  load      8 2 1 7 Diesel Exhaust    The diesel engine exhaust feature can be modified as needed  The main idea of this feature is  based on the
25.  Al train timetable  that is maxspeed is the  product of the first MAxVelocity parameter by the  Performance  parameter divided by 100      Such performance parameter list is written  divided by 100  by the AE in  Service_Definition  block  in the activity editor  again as  Efficiency   for every station stop      From the starting location of the Al train up to the first station  the  Performance  linked to such  station is used  from the first station to the second one  the  Performance  linked to the second  station is used and so on  From the last station up to end of path the  Default performance   mentioned above is used     This corresponds to MSTS behaviour  Moreover the Efficiency parameter is used also to compute acceleration and braking curves     10 12 3 Start of Run of Al train in a Section Reserved by Another Train   The Al train is created as in MSTS  It is up to the activity creator not to generate deadlocks   Creation of a train in a section where another train resides is possible only if the created train is    in  front    of the pre existing train     10 12 4 Stop Time at Stations  The platform passenger number as defined by the MSTS activity editor is read by OR     Each passenger requires 10 seconds to board  This time must be divided by the number of  passenger wagons within the platform boundaries  Also locomotives with the line     PassengerCapacity    in their  eng file count as passenger wagons  EMU  DMU   The criterion to  define if a passenger wag
26.  Apprentice    5  A page like the following should appear  Ignore the part crossed out but pay special attention  to the part enclosed in red     The Default Port Forwarding Guide  for the Airlink Rt210W    What is Port Forwarding     View all Router Screenshots         Or you can r Static IP Address guide to setup a static if    address  i setting up a static ip address  please cor       ddress you setup in the Static IP address          File       Edit View Favorites Tools Help    i Q wx       x  a A pe Search Sie Favorites QD Media  amp  B i    v    Disses        n the picture above the address bar has http   www google com in it  Just  eplace all of that with the internal IP address of your router  By default the IP    Address should be set to 192 168 1 1        6  Then follow the steps listed on the screen  Remember you want to forward port 30 000 by  default  but if you change that you ll have to forward the correct port   If you still cannot get others connected to your computer  please go to  www tsimserver com forums and ask questions     Page 181 of 206    14 Open Rails Sound Management    14 1 OR vs  MSTS Sound Management  OR executes  sms files to a very high degree of compatibility with MSTS     14 2  sms Instruction Set  OR recognizes and manages the whole MSTS  sms instruction set  in a way generally compatible  with MSTS  The differences are described below     The Activation    instruction behaves differently from MSTS with regard to cameras  CabCam   Externa
27.  Defines that a train is to wait at a station until another train has arrived  so as to let  passengers make the connection between the trains     The train will be timetabled to allow this connection  and the  connect command is set to  maintain this connection if the arriving train is running late     Note that the  connect command will not lock the signal  If the paths of this train and the  arriving train conflict before the arriving train reaches the station  additional  wait or  hold  commands must be set to avoid deadlock     Command value   reference to train which is to be waited for  this is compulsory     Page 159 of 206    Command qualifiers     maxdelay n   n is the maximum delay  in minutes  of the arriving train for which this train  is held     If the delay of the arriving train exceeds this value the train will not wait  The  maximum delay is independent from this train s own delay   This qualifier and its value are compulsory      nold h   h is the time  in minutes  the train is still held after the other train has  arrived  and relates to the time required by the passengers to make the connection   This qualifier and its value are compulsory      wait    Syntax    wait  lt train gt   maxdelay n  notstarted  owndelay n    Defines that a train is to wait for the referenced train to allow this train to proceed first    The referenced train can be routed in the same or the opposite direction as this train itself    A search is done for the first track section w
28.  HEP locomotive   Weather  Clear z 600 VAC Head End Power     Locomotive type  Diesel Electric    Path   Path Name  GO Georgetown Eastbound 210 Ext             m Singleplayer Multiplayer      Tools      Options   Start   User name     open Host port   30000    P M Logging  rails do    eee   aye client                        Timetable mode is unique to Open Rails  and is based on a    timetable    that is created in a  spreadsheet formatted in a predefined way  defining trains and their timetables  their paths  their  consists  some operations to be done at the end of the train run  and some train synchronization  rules     Timetable mode significantly reduces development time with respect to activities in cases where  no specific shunting or train operation is foreseen  The complete description of the timetable mode  can be found here     The spreadsheet has a  csv format  but it must be saved in Unicode format with the extension     timetable_or    in a subdirectory named    Openrails    that must be created in the route s  ACTIVITIES directory     For the game player  one of the most interesting features of timetable mode is that any one of the  trains defined in the timetable can be selected as the player train     The drop down window    Timetable set     allows you to select a timetable file from among those  found in the route   s    Activities Openrails     folder     Now you can select in the drop down window    Train     from all of the trains of the timetable the tr
29.  as follows by OR     e StartLoop ReleaseLoopRelease  the  wav file is continuously looped from beginning to  end  when the ReleaseLoopRelease instruction is executed  the  wav file is played up  to its end and stopped     e StartLoopRelease ReleaseLoopRelease  the  wav file is played from the beginning up  to the last CuePoint  and then continuously looped from first to last CuePoint  when    Page 184 of 206    the ReleaseLoopRelease instruction is executed  the  wav file is played up to its end  and stopped     e StartLoopRelease ReleaseLoopReleaseWithJump  the  wav file is played from the  beginning up to the last CuePoint  and then continuously looped from the first to the  last CuePoint  When the ReleaseLoopReleaseWithJump instruction is executed  the   wav file is played up to the next CuePoint  then jumps to the last CuePoint and stops   It is recommended to use this pair of instructions only where a jump is effectively  needed  as e g  in horns  this because this couple of instructions is more compute  intensive and can lead to short sound breaks in the case of high CPU loads     14 6 Testing Sound Files at Runtime  The sound debug window is a useful tool for testing     Page 185 of 206    15 Open Rails Cabs  OR supports both MSTS compatible 2D cabs as well as native 3D cabs  even on the same  locomotive     15 1 2D Cabs  OR supports with a high degree of compatibility all functions available in MSTS for 2D cabs  and  provides some significant enhancements described i
30.  at the final inward position     The  stable can be used where a train forms another train but when the train must clear the  platform before the new train can be formed to allow other trains to use that platform  It can  also be used to move a train to a siding after completing its last duty  and be  stabled  there  as static train     Separate timings can be defined for each move  if such a time is not defined  the move will  take place immediately when the previous move is completed     If timings are defined  the train will be  static  after completion of the previous move until that  required time     If the formed train has a valid station stop and the return path of the stable command   in_path  terminates in the area of the platform of the first station stop of the formed train  the   setstop  check  see setstop qualifier in  forms command  will automatically be added    Page 164 of 206    Command value   none   Command qualifiers       out_path  lt path gt     lt path gt  is the path to be used by the train to move out to the  stable   position  The start of the path must match the end of the path of the incoming  train      out_time   time   time definition when the outward run must be started  Time is defined  as HH mm and must use the 24 hour clock      in_path  lt path gt     lt path gt  is the path to be used by the train for the inward run from the     stable    position to the start of the new train  The start of the path must match  the end of the out_path  
31.  below will be ignored by MSTS  Make these additions to the  act file with  a Unicode enabled editor  Note that these additions will be removed by the MSTS Activity Editor if  the  act activity file is opened and saved as an  act file by the AE  However  if the activity is  opened in the AE and saved in an  apk Activity Package  the additions will be included     Since activity files are not used in Timetable mode  none of the following features will operate in  that mode     10 16 1 No Halt by Activity Message Box   MSTS activities may contain instructions to display a message box when the player train reaches  a specific location in the activity  or at a specific time  Normally the simulation is halted when the  message box is displayed until the player manually closes the box  This behavior can be modified  if the line     ORTSContinue   nn      where nn   number of seconds to display the box   is added to the event declaration  EventTypeLocation or EventTypeTime  in the  act file     For example        EventCategoryLocation    EventTypeLocation              ID  1   Activation Level  1    Outcomes    DisplayMessage    Test nopause         Name   Locationl      Location    146 14082  1016 56 762 16 10    TriggerOnStop   0    ORTSContinue   10       Now  the activity will continue to run while the message window is displayed  If the player does    nothing  the window disappears automatically after nn seconds  The player may close the window  manually or pause the activity by
32.  between cabs to drive the train from a  different position  If you change to a rear facing cab  then you will be driving the train in the  opposite direction     If there are many cabs in your train  pressing Ctrl E moves you through all forward and rear facing  cabs in order up to the last cab in the train  If you end up in a rear facing cab  your new    forward     direction will be your old    backward    direction  So you will now drive the train in the opposite  direction     A safety interlock prevents you from changing cabs unless the train is stationary and the direction  lever is in neutral with the throttle closed     7 6 9 Train Oscillation  You can have train cars oscillating  swaying  by hitting Ctrl V  if you want more oscillation  click  Ctrl V again  Four levels  including the no oscillation level  are available by repeating Ctrl V     7 7 Autopilot Mode  Autopilot mode is not a simulation of a train running with cruise control  instead  it is primarily a  way to test activities more easily and quickly  but it can also be used to run an activity  or part of it   as it is possible to turn autopilot mode on or off at runtime  as a trainspotter or a visitor within the  cab     Autopilot mode is enabled with the related checkbox in the Experimental Options  It is active only  in activity mode  i e  not in explorer or timetable modes      When starting the game with any activity  you are in player driving mode  If you press Alt A  you  enter the autopilot mode  yo
33.  clicking on the appropriate button in the window  Note that this  modification does not work for the terminating event of the activity     10 16 2 Al Train Horn Blow  This feature requires selection of the Extended Al train shunting option     Horn blow by Al trains is achieved by inserting into the Al train path a waiting point with a waiting  time value between 60011  1 second horn blow  and 60020  10 seconds horn blow      The Al train will not stop at these waiting points  but will continue at its regular speed     If a  normal  waiting point follows a horn blow waiting point  the horn blow must be terminated  before the normal waiting point is reached   just in case      On the other hand  a horn blow waiting point may be positioned just after a normal WP  thus  achieving the effect that the train blows the horn when it restarts      Page 149 of 206    10 16 3 Al Horn Blow at Level Crossings  If the line     ORTSAIHornAtCrossings   1      is inserted into the activity file following the line     NextActivityObjectUID   32768       note that the number in the brackets may be different   then Al trains will blow their horn at level  crossings for a random time between 2 and 5 seconds The level crossing must be defined as such  in the route editor     Simple    road crossings  not defined as level crossings  may also be present in  the route  The Al train will not blow the horn at these crossings  Examining the route with  TrackViewer allows identification of the true leve
34.  conditions around the traveling train  The  train induced flows can influence passengers on a subway platform and is also associated with the  cross sectional area of the train body  the train length  the shape of train fore  and after bodies   surface roughness of train body  etc     A high speed train entering a tunnel generates a compression wave at the entry portal that moves  at the speed of sound in front of the train  The friction of the displaced air with the tunnel wall  produces a pressure gradient and  as a consequence  a rise in pressure in front of the train  On  reaching the exit portal of the tunnel  the compression wave is reflected back as an expansion  wave but part of it exits the tunnel and radiates outside as a micro pressure wave  This wave  could cause a sonic boom that may lead to structural vibration and noise pollution in the  surrounding environment  The entry of the tail of the train into the tunnel produces an expansion  wave that moves through the annulus between the train and the tunnel  When the expansion  pressure wave reaches the entry portal  it is reflected towards the interior of the tunnel as a  compression wave  These compression and expansion waves propagate backwards and forwards  along the tunnel and experience further reflections when meeting with the nose and tail of the train  or reaching the entry and exit portals of the tunnel until they eventually dissipate completely     The presence of this system of pressure waves in a tunne
35.  coupled train  decouples and    Page 134 of 206    moves further in its own path  it can only reverse due to above conditions   The coupled train  follows its own path     2  The trainset coupling to the coupled train is a locomotive  in this case the coupling train    steals     from the coupled train all the cars between the coupled train s locomotive and the coupling train   decouples and moves further in its own path  it can only reverse due to the above conditions    The coupled train follows its own path     e or if there is no reverse point further in the path of the coupling train  the coupling train  couples with the coupled train and becomes part of it  is absorbed by it   The coupled  train follows its own path     Now on how to design paths     If one wants the coupling train to be absorbed by the coupled train  simply put the end point  of the path of the coupling train below the coupled train     If one wants the coupling train to move further on in its path after having coupled with the  coupled train  put in the path of the coupling train a reverse point below the coupled train  If  one also wants that the coupling train does not immediately restart  but that it performs a  pause  a waiting point has to be added in the path of the coupling train  subsequent to the  reverse point  It is suggested to put the waiting point near the reverse point  and in any case  in the same track section  OR will execute the waiting point even if it is not exactly below what  r
36.  currently not managed   UncoupleC  currently not managed     MSTS  sms files for crossings  crossing sms   control error and permission announcements   ingame sms  together with their triggers are managed by OR     MSTS triggers for derailment and fuel tower are currently not managed by OR     MSTS  sms files related to weather  clear_ex sms  clear_in sms  rain_ex sms  rain_in sms   snow_ex sms  snow_in sms  are managed by OR     The signal file  signal sms  and its discrete trigger 1 is managed by OR     Moreover  OR manages the extended set of discrete triggers provided by MSTSbin     Page 183 of 206    14 3 1 OR  Specific Discrete Triggers   OR manages the following set of new discrete triggers that were not present under MSTS  If  MSTS  or MSTSbin  executes an  sms where such discrete triggers are used  it simply ignores the  related statements       triggers 101   GearUp and 102   GearDown for gear based engines  they are triggered by the E resp   Shift E key and they are propagated to all gear based diesel engines of a train and run also for Al trains     triggers 103   ReverserToForwardBackward and 104   ReverserToNeutral  valid for all locomotive types    this couple of triggers allows to distinguish if the reverser is moved towards an active or towards a neutral  position  which is not possible under MSTS     triggers 105   DoorOpen and 106   DoorClose  valid for all locomotive types   they are triggered by the Q  and Shift Q keys and are propagated to the wagons of
37.  dynamic shadowing if your system has low FPS  frames per second  capability  The  options configuration that you select is saved when you click    OK     When you restart OR  it will  use the last options configuration that you selected     There are 10 option panels  described below     6 1 General Options  xl    General   Audio   Video   Simulation   Keyboard   Data logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater   Experimental         Alerter in cab  T Also in external views  IW Control confirmations  MV Dispatcher window  JV Large address aware binaries  for all 64bit and 3GB tuning on 32bit        Retainer valve on all cars    MV Graduated release air brakes    21  lt j Brake pipe charging rate  PSI s      System     Language    Automatic       Pressure unit     System v   Other units       6 1 1 Alerter in Cab    As in real life  when this option is selected  the player driving the train is required to perform  specific actions to demonstrate that he is    alive     i e  press the Alerter Button  or press the Key Z    As the player may sometimes use a view other than the cabview to follow the train  and therefore    will not see the alerter warning  selecting the related option    A so in external views    enables the  alerter in those views as well     Page 13 of 206    6 1 2 Dispatcher window   It is suggested to always select this option  When this option is selected  pressing Ctrl 9 at  runtime creates an additional window like the following  This window coexists with the 
38.  etc  still need to be included in the file  As always  make sure that you keep a backup of the  original MSTS file     Open Rails has been designed to do most of the calculations for the modeler  and typically only the key parameters are required to be  included in the ENG or WAG file  The parameters shown in the    Locomotive performance Adjustments    section should be included only  where a specific performance outcome is required  since    default    parameters should provide a satisfactory result     When creating and adjusting ENG or WAG files  a series of tests should be undertaken to ensure that the performance matches the actual  real world locomotive as closely as possible  For further information on testing  as well as some suggested test tools  go to this site     NB  These parameters are subject to change as Open Rails continues to develop        General Information                                        ORTSSteamLocomotiveType   x   ENG   Describes the type Text Simple  New ORTSSteamLocomotiveType   Simple    of locomotive Compound   Geared  WheelRadius  x   ENG ess Distance    m in   As per loco specs Existing peA   eatin    Boiler Parameters  ORTSSteamBoilerType   x   ENG   Describes the type Text Saturated  New ORTSSteamBoilerType   Saturated    of boiler Superheated       Page 90 of 206       Volume     cu ft     This parameter is  not overly critical   and where an    BoilerVolume    220  ft 3                                                     Aus     420
39.  first comment row     e  lt Blank gt  row  A row with a blank  empty  cell in the first column is taken as a continuation of the preceding  row     e  Path row  The  path row defines the path of that train  The path must be a   pat file as defined by the  MSTS Activity Editor  and must be located in the route s Path directory  This field is  compulsory     The timetable uses the same paths as those defined for activities     However  waiting points must not be defined in paths for use in timetables as the  processing of waiting points is not supported in the timetable concept    Waiting points within a timetable must be defined using the specific control  commands     The  path statement can take a qualifier    binary    Large timetables can require many paths  and loading those paths can take considerable  time  several minutes     To reduce this loading time  the paths can be stored in a processed  binary format  This  format is the same as used in the  save    command    Note that the binary path information cannot be directly accessed by the user  either for  reading or for writing    When  binary is set  the program will check if a binary path exists  If so  it will read that path     Page 154 of 206    If not  it will read the  normal  path  and will then store this as binary for future use     Binary paths are stored in a subdirectory named    OpenRails    which must be created in the  Paths directory of the route     Important    If a path is edited  the binary versi
40.  for High Speed Operations  Railway Track Engineering by  J  S  Mundrey     8 10 8 Maximum Curve Velocity   The maximum velocity on a curve may exceed the equilibrium velocity  but must be limited to  provide a margin of safety before overturning velocity is reached or a downward force sufficient to  damage the outside rail of the curve is developed  This velocity is generally referred to as  maximum safe velocity or safe speed  Although operation at maximum safe velocity will avoid  overturning of rolling stock or rail damage  a passenger riding in a conventional passenger car will  experience centrifugal force perceived as a tendency to slide laterally on their seat  creating an  uncomfortable sensation of instability  To avoid passenger discomfort  the maximum velocity on a  curve is therefore limited to what is generally referred to as maximum comfortable velocity or  comfortable speed  Operating experience with conventional passenger cars has led to the  generally accepted practice  circa 1980  of designating the maximum velocity for a given curve to  be equal to the result for the calculation of equilibrium velocity with an extra amount added to the    Page 109 of 206    actual super elevation that will be applied to the curve  This is often referred to as unbalanced  super elevation or cant deficiency  Tilt trains have been introduced to allow faster train operation  on tracks not originally designed for    high speed    operation  as well as high speed railway  operat
41.  formulae to describe its performance  Once designed and built  the  performance of the locomotive was measured and adjusted by empirical means  i e  by testing and  experimentation on the locomotive  Even locomotives within the same class could exhibit  differences in performance     A simplified description of a steam locomotive is provided below to help understand some of the  key basics of its operation     As indicated above  the steam locomotive is a heat engine which converts fuel  coal  wood  oil   etc   to heat  this is then used to do work by driving the pistons to turn the wheels  The operation  of a steam locomotive can be thought of in terms of the following broadly defined components     e Boiler and Fire  Heat conversion   e Cylinder  Work done   Boiler and Fire  Heat conversion     The amount of work that a locomotive can do will be determined by the amount of steam that can  be produced  evaporated  by the boiler     Boiler steam production is typically dependent upon the Grate Area  and the Boiler Evaporation  Area     Grate Area   the amount of heat energy released by the burning of the fuel is dependent upon the  size of the grate area  draught of air flowing across the grate to support fuel combustion  fuel  calorific value  and the amount of fuel that can be fed to the fire  a human fireman can only shovel  so much coal in an hour   Some locomotives may have had good sized grate areas  but were    poor  steamers    because they had small draught capabili
42.  general combustion engine exhaust  When operating in a steady state  the color of  the exhaust is given by the new ENG parameter    engine  ORTS  Diesel  ExhaustColor           The amount of particles emitted is given by a linear interpolation of the values of    engine ORTS   Diesel  IdleExhaust       and    engine ORTS  Diesel  MaxExhaust       in the range from 1 to 50  Ina  transient state  the amount of the fuel increases but the combustion is not optimal  Thus  the  quantity of particles is temporarily higher  e g  multiplied by the value of      engine ORTS  Diesel  ExhaustDynamics       and displayed with the color given by     engine ORTS Diesel ExhaustTransientColor          The format of the    color    value is  aarrggbb  where    aa   intensity of light  rr   red color component  gg   green color component  bb   blue color  component  and each component is in HEX number format  00 to ff      8 2 1 8 Cooling System    ORTS introduces a simple cooling and oil system within the diesel engine model  The engine  temperature is based on the output power and the cooling system output  A maximum value of  100  C can be reached with no impact on performance  It is just an indicator  but the impact on the  engine   s performance will be implemented later  The oil pressure feature is simplified and the  value is proportional to the RPM  There will be further improvements of the system later     Page 77 of 206    8 2 2 Diesel Electric Locomotives   Diesel electric locomotiv
43.  it on the Taskbar to  make it active  You can hide it by pressing Ctrl 9 again or by pressing Esc when that window has  the focus  This window is an extended version of the Dispatcher Window     You can zoom in and out by rotating the mouse wheel  or by holding both the left and right mouse  button and moving the mouse  if you do not have a mouse wheel   You can hold shift key while  click the mouse in a place in the map  which will quickly zoom in with that place in focus  You can  hold Ctrl while click the mouse in a place in the map  which will zoom out to show the whole route   Holding Alt and click will zoom out to show part of the route     Page 174 of 206                            Compose MSG  CanJoin Res 8750  m    I  Show Avatars Draw Path  I Auto Switch W Pick Signals  Penalty Pick Switches  See in Game  Assist   Normal   View Train  Remove Follow  Tang  Client       ae i  k  cota A i 2  E sena rate i ji    Cotimbia Falls   Chip  Spur    Ww       A red line will be drawn for each train so you can find its intended path     You can select a train either by clicking on the name in the right bar  or in the map by clicking the  green train body  After that  you can click the    Remove    button to delete that train from the game     You can pan the window by dragging it with the left mouse button     One can click a switch  or signal  and press Ctrl Alt G to jump to that switch with the free roam  camera     The Dispatcher player can click a switch  black dot  and cho
44.  may check this box so that OR will show the  two overhead wires that are more common     6 10 4 Show shape warnings   When this option is selected  when OR is loading the shape   s  files it will report errors in syntax  and structure  even if these don t cause runtime errors  in the Log file    OpenRailsLogFile txt    on  the desktop     6 10 5 Forced red at station stops   In case a signal is present beyond a station platform and in the same track section  no switches in  between   OR will set the signal to red until the train has stopped and then hold it as red from that  time up to two minutes before starting time  This is useful in organizing train meets and takeovers   however it does not always correspond to reality nor to MSTS operation  So with this option the  player can decide which behavior the start signal will have  This option is checked by default   Unchecking the option has an effect on simulation behavior only if no Timetable mode operation is  under way     6 10 6 Load night textures only when needed   As a default OR loads night textures together with the day textures at daytime  When this option is  selected  to reduce loading time and reduce memory used  night textures are not loaded in the  daytime and are only loaded at sunset  if the game continues through sunset time     6 10 7 Signal light glow   When this option is set  a glowing effect is added to signal semaphores when seen at distance  so  that they are visible at a greater distance  There are 
45.  must be separated by         Additional control commands can be included  Such commands can also be set for locations  where the train does not stop and therefore has no timing details  but the train must pass through    Page 153 of 206    that location for the commands to be effective     Although a location itself can be defined more than once in a timetable  it is not possible to define  timing details for trains for a location more than once  If a train follows a route which takes it  through the same location more than once  the train must be  split  into separate train entries     11 4 5 Special Columns    e  Comment column  A column with the  comment definition in the first row is a comment column and is ignored  when reading the timetable  except for the cell at the intersection of the first comment column  and the first comment row     e  lt Blank gt  column  A column with a blank  empty  cell in the first row is taken as a continuation of the preceding  column  It can be used to insert control commands which apply to the details in the preceding  column  This can be useful when timings are derived automatically through formulas in the  spreadsheet as inserting commands in the timing cell itself would exclude the use of such  formulas     11 4 6 Special rows    e  Comment row  A row with the  comment definition in the first column is a comment row and is ignored when  reading the timetable  except for the cell at the intersection of the first comment column and  the
46.  necessary to consider the performance of the  following elements     e Boiler and Fire  Heat conversion     e Cylinder  Work done   For more details on these elements  refer to the    Elements of Steam Locomotive Operation     Summary of Driving Tips    Wherever possible  when running normally  have the regulator at 100   and use the  reverser to adjust steam usage and speed     Avoid jerky movements when starting or running the locomotive  thus reducing the  chances of breaking couplers     When starting always have the reverser fully wound up  and open the regulator slowly  and smoothly  without slipping the wheels   8 4 2 1 Open Rails Steam Functionality  Fireman   The Open Rails Steam locomotive functionality provides two operational options     1  Automatic Fireman  Computer Controlled    In Automatic or Computer Controlled Fireman mode all locomotive firing and boiler management  is done by Open Rails  leaving the player to concentrate on driving the locomotive  Only the  basic controls such as the regulator and throttle are available to the player     2  Manual Fireman   In Manual Fireman mode all locomotive firing and boiler management must be done by the  player  All of the boiler management and firing controls  such as blower  injector  fuel rate  are  available to the player  and can be adjusted accordingly     A full listing of the keyboard controls for use when in manual mode is provided on the Keyboard  tab of the Open Rails Options panel     Use the keys Crtl 
47.  of  dispose Command For Player Train   When the player train terminates and a  dispose command is set for that train to form another  train  either  form   trigger or  stable   the train will indeed form the next train as detailed  and that  next train will now be the new player train  So the player can continue with that train  for instance  on a return journey    On forming the new train  the train will become    Inactive     This is a new state  in which the train is  not authorized to move    Note that the F4 Track Monitor information is not updated when the train is  Inactive   The    Next  Station    display in the F10 Activity Monitor will show details on when the train is due to start  The  train will become    active    at the start time as defined for the formed train  For information  the  Activity Monitor window shows the name of the train which the player is running     Page 166 of 206    11 5 3 Termination of a Timetable Run  On reaching the end of a timetable run  the program will not be terminated automatically but has to  be terminated by the player     11 5 4 Calculation of Running Delay   An approximate value of the delay is continuously updated  This approximation is derived from the  booked arrival time at the next station  If the present time is later as the booked arrival  and that  difference exceeds the present delay  the delay is set to that difference  The time required to reach  that station is not taken into account    This approximation will res
48.  or  for the turnout behind the train  the Shift G key      e Hold down the Alt key and use the left mouse button to click on the switch in the Main  Window     Use the dispatcher window  as described here     Please note that with the last two methods you can throw any switch  not only the one in front but  also the one behind the train     However  note also that not all switches can be thrown  in some cases the built in Al dispatcher  holds the switch in a state to allow trains  especially Al trains  to follow their predefined path     The arrow and eye symbols have the same meaning as in the track monitor  The switch is red  when it is reserved or occupied by the train  and green when it is free     A switch shown in green can be operated  a switch shown in red is locked     Page 44 of 206    7 4 11 F9 Train Operations Monitor   The Open Rails Train Operations window is similar in function to the F9 window in MSTS  but  includes additional features to control the air brake connections of individual cars  For example  it is  possible to control the connection of the air brake hoses between individual cars  to uncouple cars  without losing the air pressure in the train   s air brake hose  or uncouple cars with their air brakes  released so that they will coast     The unit which the player has selected as the unit from which to control the train  i e  the lead unit   is shown in red     Cars are numbered according to their UiD in the Consist file   con  or UiD in the Activi
49.  recommended to adjust the table below to get more realistic  behavior     In ORTS  single or multiple engines can be set for one locomotive  In case there is more than one  engine  other engines act like helpers    engines  start   stop controls  Shift Y by default   The  power of each active engine is added to the locomotive power  The number of such diesel engines  is not limited     If the ORTS specific definition is used  each parameter is tracked and if one is missing  it is  estimated from the MSTS specific settings  In case DieselPowerTab and or DieselTorqueTab are  missing  the missing table is computed based on the existing one  or both are filled by default  tables                 Engine   ORTSDieselEngines   2 Num of engines  Diesel    IdleRPM  510   Idle RPM  MaxRPM   1250   Maximal RPM  StartingRPM   400   Starting RPM  StartingConfirmRPM   570   Starting confirmation RPM  ChangeUpRPMpsS   50   Increasing change rate RPM s  ChangeDownRPMpsS   20   Decreasing change rate RPM s  RateOfChangeUpRPMpSsS  5  Jerk of ChangeUpRPMpS RPM   s        Page 75 of 206                    RateOfChangeDownRPMpSS   5   MaximalPower   300kW     IdleExhaust  5     MaxExhaust   50     ExhaustDynamics   10    ExhaustColor   00 fe    ExhaustTransientColor   00 00 00 00    DieselPowerTab      0 0   510 2000  520 5000  600 2000  800 70000    1000 100000   1100 200000   1200 280000   1250 300000       DieselConsumptionTab      0 0  510 10  1250 245       ThrottleRPMTab    0 510  5 520  10
50.  runround qualifier needs a path  which defines the path the engine s  is to take when performing the runround  If the train has  more than one leading engine  all engines will be run round  Any other power units within the  train will not be moved    For specific rules and conditions for runround to work  see discussion on the relationship  between signalling and the timetable concept    If runround is defined  the time at which the runround is to take place can be defined  If this  time is not set  the runround will take place immediately on termination of the incoming train     Command value   referenced train  this is compulsory     Command qualifiers       runround  lt path gt     lt path gt  is the path to be used by the engine to perform the runround   This qualifier is optional  if set  the value is compulsory      rrtime time  time is the definition of the time at which the runround is to take place  The  time must be defined in HH mm and must use the 24 hour clock   This qualifier is only valid in combination with the  runround qualifier  is  optional but if set  the value is compulsory      setstop  if this train itself has no station stops defined but the train it is to form starts at a  station  this command will copy the details of the first station stop of the formed    Page 163 of 206    train  to ensure this train will stop at the correct location    For this qualifier to work correctly  the path of the incoming train must  terminate in the platform area of t
51.  set to control train and signaling behaviour and actions   There are four sets of commands available      e Location commands  e Train control commands  e Create commands  e Dispose commands  11 4 7 2 Command syntax  All commands have the same basic syntax   A command consists of    Syntax name   defines the control command     Syntax value   set the value related to the command   Not all commands take a value     Syntax qualifiers   adds additional information to the command   Not all commands have qualifiers   Some qualifiers may be optional but others may be compulsory  or compulsory only  in combination with other qualifiers     Syntax qualifier values   a qualifier may require a value  Command syntax     name   value  qualifier value  Multiple values may be set  separated by       Note that any qualifiers always apply to all values   11 4 7 3 Train Reference  Many commands require a reference to another train     This reference is the other train s name as defined in the first row     11 4 7 4 Location Commands  Location commands are     hold   forcehold   nowaitsignal   terminal    These commands are also available as train control commands and are detailed in that paragraph     Page 158 of 206    11 4 7 5 Train control commands   All available train control commands are detailed below     These commands can be set for each timing cell  i e  at each intersection of train column and  location row  The commands will apply at and from the location onward  if applicable   
52.  size selection  and a choice of regular or bold  style  More than one font or size can be used in the same cabview  Here is an example     80 100 120    ER  12 12151    Ai    12 00 23       An optional line of the format ORTSfont   fontsize fontstyle  fontfamily    has to be inserted in the   cvf block of the digital control or digital clock  where    fontsize    is a float  default value 10      fontstyle     an integer having the value 0  default  for regular and 1 for bold  and    fontfamily    is a string with the  font family name  ex   Times New Roman    The default is  Courier New      This is an example that displays a 12 pt  bold font using the Sans Serif font family     DigitalClock    Type   CLOCK DIGITAL CLOCK    Position   40 350 56 11    Style   12HOUR    Accuracy   1    ControlColour   255 255 255    ORTSFont  12 1  Sans Serif          Only the first parameter of ORTSFont can be present  or only the first two  or all three   Note that you cannot use the MS Cabview editor on the  cvf file after having inserted these  optional lines  because the editor will delete these added lines when the file is saved     Page 188 of 206    15 3 3D cabs  The key to enter into a 3D cab  provided the player locomotive has one  is Alt 1     15 3 1 Development Rules  for content developers   1  The 3D cab is described by an  s file  the associated  ace or  dds files  and a  cvf file having the  same name as the  s file  All these files reside in a folder named    CABVIEW3D    cre
53.  so you can add a delay with the optional  parameter ORTSCircuitBreakerClosingDelay       The power on sequence time delay can be adjusted by the optional ORTSPowerOnDelay    value   for example   ORTSPowerOnDelay  5 s   within the Engine section of the  eng file  value in  seconds   The same delay for auxiliary systems can be adjusted by the optional parameter  ORTSAuxPowerOnDelay        A scripting interface is available in order to create a customized circuit breaker or a customized  power supply system  it will be useful later when the key bindings will be customizable for each  locomotive      The power status is indicated by the    Electric power    value in the HUD view  The pantographs of  all locomotives in a consist are triggered by    Control Pantograph First    and    Control Pantograph  Second    commands     P    and    Shift P    by default   The status of the pantographs is indicated by  the    Pantographs       value in the HUD view     Page 79 of 206    8 4 Steam Locomotives  8 4 1 General Introduction to Steam Locomotives    8 4 1 1 Principles of Train Movement    Key Points to Remember     Steam locomotive tractive effort must be greater than the train resistance forces   Train resistance is impacted by the train itself  curves  gradients  tunnels  etc     Tractive effort reduces with speed  and will reach a point where it  equals  the train  resistance  and thus the train will not be able to go any faster     This point will vary as the train resistance v
54.  switches     in  between      WPs set in a path used by a player train have no influence on the train run  except     again when  the WP is followed by a signal in the same track section  In such cases  for both Al trains and  player train  the signal is set to red when the train approaches the WP     For Al trains the signal returns to green  if the block conditions after the signal allow this  one  second after expiration of the WP     Player trains must stop BEFORE the WP  or else they get an emergency stop   In this case the  signal returns to green 5 seconds after expiration of the WP     If there are more WPs in the track section where the signal resides  only the last one influences  the signal     Waiting points cannot be used in Timetable mode     Page 128 of 206    10 7 2 Absolute Waiting Points   When the    Extended Al shunting    option is selected and OR is not in Timetable Mode  waiting  points with a    waiting time    between 30000 and 32359 are interpreted as absolute time of day  waiting points  with a format 3HHMM  where HH and MM are the hour and minute of the day in  standard decimal notation     If the Al train will reach the WP before this time of day  the WP will expire at HH MM  If the Al train  will reach the WP later  the WP will expire after one second  This type of WP can also be used in  conjunction with a signal in the same track section  as explained in preceding paragraph     Again  such waiting points won t have an effect on a player train 
55.  the coal and water levels of the locomotive     For information on the other parameters  such as the brakes  refer to the relevant sections in the  manual     Page 88 of 206    For the driver of the locomotive the first two steam parameters are the key ones to focus on  as  operating the locomotive for extended periods of time with steam usage in excess of the steam  generation value will result in declining boiler pressure  If this is allowed to continue the locomotive  will ultimately lose boiler pressure  and will no longer be able to continue to pull its load     Steam usage will increase with the speed of the locomotive  so the driver will need to adjust the  regulator  reverser  and speed of the locomotive to ensure that optimal steam pressure is  maintained  However  a point will finally be reached where the locomotive cannot go any faster  without the steam usage exceeding the steam generation  This point determines the maximum  speed of the locomotive and will vary depending upon load and track conditions    Page 89 of 206    8 4 3 Steam Locomotive     Physics Parameters for Optimal Operation  for content developers     8 4 3 1 Required Input ENG and WAG File Parameters    The OR Steam Locomotive Model  SLM  should work with default MSTS files  however optimal performance will only be achieved if the  following settings are applied within the ENG file  The following list only describes the parameters associated with the SLM  other  parameters such as brakes  lights 
56.  the consist  that is also the  sms files of the wagons  can refer to these triggers      triggers 107   MirrorOpen and 108   MirrorClose  valid for all locomotive types   they are triggered by the  Shift Q key     Triggers from 109 to 118 are used for TCS scripting  as follows       triggers 109 and 110  TrainControlSystemInfo1 and  Info2     triggers 111 and 112  TrainControlSystemActivate and  Deactivate    triggers 113 and 114  TrainControlSystemPenalty1 and  Penalty2     triggers 115 and 116  TrainControlSystemWarning1 and  Warning2    triggers 117 and 118  TrainControlSystemAlert1 and  Alert2     Triggers from 121 to 136 are used to synchronize steam locomotive chuffs with wheel rotation   The sixteen triggers are divided into two wheel rotations  Therefore every trigger is separated from the  preceding one by a rotation angle of 45 degrees     In addition  OpenRails extends triggers 23 and 24  electric locomotive power on power off   that  were introduced by MSTSbin  to diesel engines  Keys Y  for diesel player engine  and Shift Y  for  diese helpers   apart from physically powering on and off the diesel engines  trigger the above  triggers     14 4 Variable Triggers  OR manages all of the variable triggers managed by MSTS  There can be some difference in the  relationship between physical locomotive variables  e g  Force  and the related variable  This  applies to Variable2 and Variables     14 5 Sound Loop Management    Sound loop management instructions are executed
57.  the track or overturning  The following drawing  illustrates the basic concept described   Lateral displacement of the centre of gravity permitted by the suspension system of the rolling  stock is not illustrated     Page 107 of 206       Centre of Gravity    dy U    W    Figure 1   Forces at work when a train rounds a curve  8 10 5 Use of Super Elevation  In order to counteract the effect of centrifugal force Fc the outside rail of the curve may be  elevated above the inside rail  effectively moving the centre of gravity of the rolling stock laterally    toward the inside rail   This procedure is generally referred to as super elevation  If the combination of lateral    displacement of the centre of gravity provided by the super elevation  velocity of the rolling stock  and radius of curve is such that resulting force Fr becomes centred between and perpendicular to    a line across the running rails the downward pressure on the outside and inside rails of the curve  will be the same  The super elevation that produces this condition for a given velocity and radius of    curve is known as the balanced or equilibrium elevation          Centre of Gravity                   ARE   Ee  A Fr W w     _    G  gt     Figure 2   This illustrates the above concept     Page 108 of 206    8 10 6 Limitation of Super Elevation in Mixed Passenger  amp  Freight Routes   Typical early railway operation resulted in rolling stock being operated at less than equilibrium  velocity  all wheels equal
58.  when crossing tile boundaries do  not compete with the main rendering loop  RenderProcess  for the same CPU cycles  Thread  safety issues are handled primarily through data partitioning rather than locks or semaphores to  maximise performance     Ongoing testing by the Open Rails team and the community will determine what and where the  practical limits of the software lie  As the development team receives feedback from the  community  improvements and better optimization of the software will contribute to better overall  performance     potentially allowing high polygon models with densely populated routes at  acceptable frame rates     Page 201 of 206    21 Plans and Roadmap  Here are some highlights that the community can expect from the Open Rails team after v1 0   A more complete roadmap can be found at https   launchpad net or  milestones    21 1 User Interface  A new Graphical User Interface  GUI  within the game     21 2 Operations  In addition to the new Timetable concept described in this document  some further  improvements are planned   e Extended ability to customize signals to accommodate regional  geographic  or  operational differences    e Ability to use mixed signal environments   from dark territory to fully automatic in cab  train control within the same route    e Specifying random variations for Al trains in consist and delays   e Specifying separate speed profiles for passenger or freight trains   e Al trains which can split or combine    e A schedule 
59.  will require pressing the    backslash  key to connect the air hoses  correctly and then waiting for the brake pressure to stabilize again     8 6 1 3 Setting Brake Retainers    If a long consist is to be taken down a long or steep grade the operator may choose to set the     Brake Retainers    on some or all of the cars to create a fixed braking force by those cars when the  train brakes are released   This requires that the retainer capability of the cars be enabled  either  by the menu option    Retainer valve on all cars     or by the inclusion of an appropriate keyword in  the car   s  wag file   The train must be fully stopped and the main brakes must be applied so that  there is adequate pressure in the brake cylinders  Pressing Shift   controls how many cars in the  consist have their retainers set  and the pressure value that is retained when the train brakes are  released  The settings are described in Brake Retainers below  Pressing Shift   cancels the  settings and exhausts all of the air from the brake cylinders when the brakes are released  The F5  display shows the symbol    RV ZZ    for the state of the retainer valve in all cars  where ZZ is     EX     for    Exhaust    or    LP    or    HP     When the system brakes are released and there are no retainers  set  the air in the brake cylinders in the cars is normally released to the air  The BC pressure for  the cars with retainers set will not fall below the specified value  In order to change the retainer  
60. 0 15 4 TrainHasCallOn Function    This function is intended specifically to allow trains to    call on  in Timetable mode when allowed to  do so as defined in the timetable  The use of this function allows a train to    call on  into a platform  in Timetable mode without jeopardizing the functionality in normal Activity mode     Page 145 of 206    It is a Boolean function and returns state as follows    e Activity Mode      e Returns true if    e Route from signal is not leading into a platform   e Timetable Mode      e Returns true if    e Route from signal is not leading into a platform     e Route from signal is leading into a platform and the train has a booked stop in  that platform  and either of the following states is true      e Train has  CallOn command set for this station     e Train has  Attach command set for this station and the train in the  platform is the train which it has to attach to     e Train is part of RunRound command  and is to attach to the train  presently in the platform     The use of this function must be combined with a check for  blockstate     BLOCK_OCCUPIED     Note   this function must NOT be used in combination with  blockstate     JN_OBSTRUCTED     The state JN OBSTRUCTED is used to indicate that the route is not accessible to the train  e g   switch set against the train  opposite movement taking place etc       Some signal scripts allow signals to clear on blockstate     JN_OBSTRUCTED  This can lead to  all kinds of incorrect situation
61. 0lb h          BoilerVolume   x   ENG Volume of boiler    we actual value is not Existing BoilerVolume    110  m 3      available  use  EvapArea   8 3 as  an approximation  i Boiler evaporation   Area   sq ft  sq ORTSEvaporationArea    2198  ft 2      RTSE A  ORTSEvaporationArea   x   ENG ae a As per loco specs New ORTSEvaporationArea    194  m42      Max boiler  A   Pressure     psi  SEP MaxBoilerPressure   200psi    MaxBoilerP  axBoilerPressure   x   ENG working pressure kPa As per loco specs Existing MaxBoilerPressure   200kPa     Gauge pressure   Superheating Area     sq ft  sq ORTSSuperheatArea   2198  ft 2      RT  heatA  ORT SSuperbeat nea  ENG heating area m As per loco specs men ORTSSuperheatArea   194  m   2      Locomotive Tender Info  Mass   Ibs  kg    1 uk gal   10lb  lt  MaxTenderWater Mass   36500lb    MaxT Wat  axTenderWaterMass   x   ENG Water in tender eee As per loco specs Existing MaxTenderWaterMass   16000kg    8 34lb  MaxTenderCoalMass   x   ENG Coal in tender Mass   Ibs  kg As per loco specs Existing ea Lerman etre  Fire  Locomotive fire Area     sq ft  sq ORTSGrateArea   2198  ft 2      ORTSGrateA EN A   N  Parenrsa N  G grate area m S corgi ii ORTSGrateArea    194  m 2      Internet search     See  ORTSFuelCalorific   x   ENG Calorific value of Energy Density for coal use a New ee ee  fuel     btu Ib  kj kg default value of J  KE  13700 btu lb    Use following as   aor  Maximum fuel defaults  New     ORTSSteamFiremanMaxPossibleFiringRate  hat fi    OR
62. 11G3DCab demo trainset  In the CABVIEW3D folder of  that download you will find an ace file called  SPEED ACE   Copy that file and paste it into the  CABVIEWSD folder for your model     Now  open OR and test your speedometer     Page 190 of 206    16 OR Specific Route Features  As a general rule and as already stated  Open Rails provides all route functionalities that were  already available for MSTS  plus some opportunities such as also accepting textures in  dds  format     OR provides a simple way to add snow terrain textures  the following default snow texture names  are recognized  ORTSDefaultSnow ace and ORTSDefaultDMSnow ace  to be positioned within  folder TERRTEX SNOW of the concerned route  For the snow textures that are missing in the  SNOW subfolder  and only for them  ORTS uses such files to display snow  if they are present   instead of using file blank omp     To have a minimum working snow texture set  the file microtex ace must also be present in the  SNOW subfolder     Page 191 of 206    17 Developing OR Content    Open Rails is defining and developing its own development tools     However it is already possible to develop OR content  rolling stock  routes  3D objects  activities   using the tools used to develop MSTS content  thanks to the high compatibility that OR has with  MSTS  Below  some of the advantages of OR specific content are described     17 1 Rolling Stock  1  OR is able to display shapes with many more polygons than MSTS  Shapes with more tha
63. 12 10 Using the Public Server    A special public server is deployed so that you do not need to use your own computer as the  server  avoiding the setup problems you may encounter  You can find the IP and port numbers  here      To connect to this public server you must act as described here  using IP and port numbers as  found on the above link  with only a difference  the first player entering the session has to enter by  clicking on    Client    and not on    Server     even if he intends to be the dispatcher  If the port has no  player yet  whoever connects first will be declared the dispatcher  others connected later will be  normal players     The public server runs a special code that is not part of OR  If you plan to run such a server for  free  please contact the email listed in http   tsimserver com forums showthread php 2560     12 10 1 Additional info on using the Public Server  e If the computer of the player acting as dispatcher crashes or if the connection with it  breaks down  the public server will try to appoint another player as dispatcher  Such  player will receive on his monitor the following message     You are the new  dispatcher  Enjoy        e lf aclient crashes or loses the connection  its position is held by the server for about  two minutes  If the client re enters the game within such time frame  it will re enter the  game in the position where he was at the moment of the crash     Page 177 of 206    13 Multi Player  Setting up a Server from Your 
64. 200 300   Czech Rep    Tilting trains 150 270   France     Tilting trains 180 260   Germany     Tilting trains 180 300   Italy     Tilting trains 160 275   Norway   Tilting trains 150 280   Spain   Tilting trains 160 210    equivalent for standard   gauge   139   182    Sweden   Tilting trains 150 245   UK      Tilting trains 180 300    Table 2   Super Elevation limits  source   Tracks for tilting trains   A study within the Fast And  Comfortable Trains  FACT  project by B  Kufver  R  Persson     8 11 Super Elevation  Curve Speed Limit  Application in OR  Open Rails implements this function  and has    standard    default values applied  The user may  elect to specify some of the standard parameters used in the above formula     8 11 1 OR Super Elevation Parameters  Typical OR parameters can be entered in the Wagon section of the  wag or  eng file  and are  formatted as below        ORTSUnbalancedSuperElevation   3in    ORTSTrackGauge  4ft 8 5in        8 11 2 OR Super Elevation Default Values  The above values can be entered into the relevant files  or alternatively OR will default to the  following functionality     OR will initially use the speed limit value from the route   s  trk file to determine whether the route is  a conventional mixed freight and passenger route or a high speed route     Page 111 of 206    Speed limit  lt  200km h  125mph      Mixed Freight and Pass route  Speed limit  gt  200km h  125mph      High speed passenger route  Default    values of tracksup
65. 3 1705 1024 4 024    Shadow primitives 1468 195 356 Slop j6    Render primitiv   913 Aff  1 2     Loader proce  Sound proc  Total process  Camera       The values in the    Camera    line refer to the two tile coordinates and to the three coordinates within  the tile     Page 66 of 206    At the bottom of the picture  some moving graphs are displayed that show the actual load of the  computer     i tat  Erame time       Referring to memory occupation  about at least 400 MB must remain free to avoid out of memory  exceptions    By pressing Ctrl Alt F6 at runtime you get a picture like this one that allows you to take note of  the interactive IDs for debugging purposes           Version CUEVA ENIS 1640082   Tms 20019   Ghee Poed  Fone   Tein beko Gen  Senio BOGS bar BE OEP 68 EON EP 8A ter    R G23  Engine teke 0  16S  PLATFORID Maread 1707 S  FNAL ee SIGNAL  Oynemite beke THEO SIGNAL 1193S VAL   1Up2 Dawn 7000 MAL LI SOUNDREGION  Cram eke   Clase     Beanie Poman  y parm 0 09 a 3 pushing   ON     6       Page 67 of 206    7 15 8 Viewing Signal State and Switches    By pressing Ctrl Alt F11 you get a picture like the following that shows the state of the signals  and switches on the path                       7 15 9 Sound Debug Window Oe              es  By pressing Alt S this window opens  Selected sound Active sounds  Speed 7 8 ABe 44   a  It shows in the upper part the list of all active sMS    veistie  foz Popa aie baa apa  files  by expanding the detail of a specific  smMS
66. 5 of 206    e The Al train proceeds with the locomotive at the rear  and wants to uncouple and  proceed in the reverse direction  a reverse point has to be put in the point where the  train will stop  and a WP has to be put sequentially after the reverse point  somewhere  under the part of the train that will remain with the train  formatted as above  As the  train has changed direction at the reverse point  again cars are counted starting from  the locomotive     e The Al locomotive proceeds and couples to a loose consist  and wants to get only a  part of it  a reverse point is inserted under the loose consist  and a WP is inserted  sequentially after the reverse point  somewhere under the part of the train that will  remain with the train  formatted as above     What is NOT currently possible is the ability to couple the Al train to the player train or to another  Al train  and to  steal  from it a predefined number of cars  With the currently available functions it  is only possible to steal all the cars or to pass all the cars  If it is desired that only a number of cars  be passed from an Al or player train to the other  the first Al train has to uncouple these cars as  described above  then move a bit forward  and then make the second Al train couple to these  Cars     10 13 2 3 Function 6  Join and split   Introduction     Join and split means that two trains  Al or player  each start running on their own path  then they  join and run coupled together a part of their p
67. 82 138750   5 50288   10 25144   20 12572   50 5029     875     0 161875   2 12 161875   5 68447   10 34223   20 17112   50 6845    Tel   0 185000   2 42 185000   5 89400   10 44700   20 22350   50 8940            The ORTSMaxTractiveForceCurves are formed by blocks of pairs of parameters representing    speed in metres per second and tractive force in Newtons  these blocks are each related to the  value of the throttle setting present at the top of each block  For intermediate values of the speed  an interpolated value is computed to get the tractive force  and the same method applies for  intermediate values of the throttle     Page 117 of 206    It is not possible to replace only a part of the Lights   block  It must be replaced in its entirety     8 15 Train Control System  The Train Control System is a system that ensures the safety of the train     In MSTS  4 TCS monitors were defined  the vigilance monitor  the overspeed monitor  the  emergency stop monitor and the AWS monitor  Open Rails does not support the AWS monitor     In order to define the behavior of the monitors  you must add a group of parameters for each  monitor in the Engine section of the  eng file  These groups are called VigilanceMonitor        OverspeedMonitor    EmergencyStopMonitor   and AWSMonitor       In each group  you can define several parameters  which are described in the tables below     Page 118 of 206       General parameters       MonitoringDevice  MonitorTimeLimit  x      Period of time 
68. 9 38 13  shrtpass 2012 12 27 18 36 04                            OR will pack the necessary files into a single archive file with the extension  ORSavePack  and  place it in the folder Open Rails Save Packs     This ORSavePack file is a zip archive which contains the replay commands  a screenshot at the  moment of saving  a Save file  so that Open Rails can offer its Resume option  and a log file  This  arrangement means that the ORSavePack archive is ideal for attaching to a bug report     You can use the  mport Save Pack button on the same window to import and unpack a set of files  from an ORSavePack archive  They will then appear in your Saved Games window     7 15 Analysis Tools  The extended HUDs provide a rich amount of information for analysis  evaluation and to assist in  troubleshooting     You can move through the sequence of HUD displays by repeatedly pressing Shift F5     You can turn off any extended HUD  while continuing to show the basic HUD  by pressing Alt F5   Pressing Alt F5 again returns the display of the currently active extended HUD     Page 59 of 206    This page shows in the first line data about the whole train  Under    Player    you will find the train  number as assigned by OR followed by an    F    if the forward cab is selected  and an    R    if the rear    2    CONSIST INFORMATION    Player Tilted Type Weight Control Mode Out of Control Cab Aspect  OF False Pass 467t EXPLORER UNDEFINED Clear 2 f       20    O  o       Flipped Type Weight Drn 
69. Cabs Wheels  False Pass 96t DF    False Pass 62t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   False Pass 32t   True Pass 20t    Ta    0  1  2  4  3  1  1       cab is selected        Tilted    is true in case the consist name ends with    tilted     e g  ETR460_tilted con   in which case it  means that it is a tilting train        Control mode    shows the actual control mode  Read more about this  Cab aspect shows the aspect of next signal     In the other lines data about the train cars are shown  Data are mostly self explanatory  Under  Drv Cabs a D appears if the car is drivable  and an F and or a R appear if the car has a front  and or a rear cab     The next extended HUD display shows locomotive information     MOTIVE INFO  on Forward    Fwd Mud I 242 Fuel 20062 L    Status  Running Power 31 3163 Wi Load 76 5  7126  RPM Flow  Cart Fwd Mud   Circuit breaker Glosed TCS OK D Auxiliary power PowerOn  Can2 Ew MU d    ey  Input 23 y 160  3 S  p 4242 SSF uel  Cal14 359 btu Ib  Adj   Port Open0 09 f    S O o ip  Boi e T SS 1  34 660 Ib h Boiler Eff 0  8   Heat 17198 btu lb tu Ib and 35Aebtu tte3 Heat 29857 673 btu WESS 2 718 514 btu  Temp    3 EIG S o 091 NES 2    CUrSupen 128 F Sup  Facts 1 29    Comp  h Oilb h Cock Obh Gen 105 Ib h    Stoke Ovlb h  Exhaust 2  ck Tapsi PreComp 1 apsi PreAdm       kapsi MEP 43 apsi   MaxiSafe 16 006 Ib h  2 x 3 0   Boil  Heat True Gear False    Fuel 124
70. Douglas Jones  Edward Keenan  Eric Pannese  Eric Swenson  Eugen Rippstein    Jim Jendro   Jim Ward   John Sandford  Joseph Hoevet  Joseph Realmuto  Larry Steiner  Laurie Heath  Lutz Doellermann  Marc Nelson  Markus Gelbmann  Mat  j Pacha  Matt Peddlesden  Matt Munro   Paul Bourke   Paul Gausden  Paul Wright  Peter Gulyas  Peter Newark  Phil Voxland  Remus lancu  Richard Plokhaar  Rick Grout   Rick Hargraves  Riemer Grootjans  Rob Lane    Fabian Joris Robert Hodgson  Gy  rgy S  rosi Robert Murphy  Greg Davies Roberto Ceccarelli  Hank Sundermeyer Robert Roeterdink  Haifeng Li Samuel Kelly  James Ross  Scott Miller  Jan Vytla  il Sid Penstone  Jean Louis Chauvin Tim Muir  Jeff Bush Walter Niehoff  Jeffrey Kraus Yao Wes Card   e Jijun Tang and           1 Member of the Open Rails Management Team    Page 203 of 206    Dave Nelson for providing us a meeting place at Elvas Tower   Pete Peddlesden for hosting our website and repository     and of course  Wayne Campbell for inspiring this improbable journey     Page 204 of 206    23 Appendices    23 1 Units of Measure  Open Rails supports the same default units of measure as MSTS which are mostly  but not  exclusively  metric     When creating models just for Open Rails  we recommend you do not use defaults but specify  units for all values that represent physical quantities     As shown below  Open Rails provides a wider choice of units than MSTS                                                  Measure Default   Applies OR MSTS Comme
71. Draw Calls  As an aid to performance Open Rails will  examine a scene and will issue Draw Calls for only the models that are visible  As you rotate the  camera  other models will come into view and some that were in view will leave the scene   resulting in a variable number of Draw Calls  all of which will affect the frame rate     Model builders are advised that the best performance will result by not mixing different material  types in a texture file as well as using the fewest number of texture files as is practical     17 6 Support  Support can be requested on the OR forum on www elvastower com forums      The OR development team  within the limits of its possibilities  is willing to Support contents  developers     Page 193 of 206    18 Version 1 0 Known Issues    18 1 Water Pickup from Troughs    This capability of MSTS has not yet been implemented in ORTS  Currently  there is a temporary  solution     by default  the key T  Refill  performs a refill of the water to the 100  level when the  locomotive is more than 2000 m  from a water source  Refilling from water towers is currently  implemented     18 2 Empty    Effects    Section in  eng File    If an engine file is used that has an Effects   section that contains no data  the engine will not be  loaded by ORTS     Page 194 of 206    19 In Case Of Malfunction    19 1 Introduction  When you have an issue with Open Rails  ORTS   no matter what it is  the OR development team  is always thankful for reports of possible bu
72. DrawLight   0     DrawLight   3     DrawLight   6            SignalDrawState   7   LowWhite   DrawLights   3  DrawLight   0    DrawLight   3    DrawLight   7 SignalFlags   FLASHING             SignalAspects   8    SignalAspect   STOP  Red      SignalAspect  STOP_AND_PROCEED  LowWhite  SpeedMPH 25     SignalAspect   RESTRICTING  LowYellow  SpeedMPH 25     SignalAspect  APPROACH_1  MidYellow  SpeedMPH 40     SignalAspect  APPROACH_2  TopYellowMidGreen      SignalAspect  APPROACH_3  TopYellow      SignalAspect  CLEAR_1  MidGreen  SpeedMPH 40     SignalAspect  CLEAR_2  TopGreen            ApproachControlSettings    PositionM  500    SpeedMpH  10      SignalNumClearAhead  5      Page 143 of 206    Signal function  reduced to show use of approach control only    This function uses approach control for the    lower    route    CLL   SCRIPT SL_J_40_LAC       Searchlight Top Main Junction    extern float block_state      extern float route_set      extern float def_draw_state        extern float next_sig_Ir      extern float sig_feature        extern float state   extern float draw_state   extern float enabled             Returned states      drawn        SIGASP_STOP           Top Cleared        SIGASP_APPROACH_3        SIGASP_APPROACH_2     SIGASP_CLEAR_2       Middle Cleared          SIGASP_APPROACH_1     SIGASP_CLEAR_1       Lower Cleared       SIGASP_RESTRICTING        SIGASP_STOP_AND_PROCEED       User Flags           USER1   copy top approach      USER2   top approach junction  
73. F to switch between Manual and Automatic firing modes     Page 86 of 206    8 4 2 2 Hot or Cold Start    The locomotive can be started either in a hot or cold mode  Hot mode simulates a locomotive  which has a full head of steam and is ready for duty     Cold mode simulates a locomotive that has only just had the fire raised  and still needs to build up  to full boiler pressure  before having full power available     This function can be selected through the Open Rails options menu on the Simulation tab   8 4 2 3 Main Steam Locomotive Controls    This section will describe the control and management of the steam locomotive based upon the  assumption that the Automatic fireman is engaged  The following controls are those typically used  by the driver in this mode of operation     Cylinder Cocks   allows water condensation to be exhausted from the cylinders    Open Rails Keys  toggle C    Regulator   controls the pressure of the steam injected into the cylinders    Open Rails Keys  D   increase  A   decrease     Reverser   controls the valve gear and when the steam is  cutoff   Typically it is expressed as a  fraction of the cylinder stroke      Open Rails Keys  W   increase  S   decrease   Continued operation of the W or S key will  eventually reverse the direction of travel for the locomotive     Brake   controls the operation of the brakes    Open Rails Keys        increase      decrease   Recommended Option Settings    For added realism of the performance of the steam locom
74. Information     The setting of the retained pressure and the number of retainers is controlled using the Ctrl   and  Ctrl   keys  Ctrl plus the left and right square bracket    and    keys on an English keyboard   The  Ctrl   key will reset the retainer on all cars in the consist to exhaust  the default position   Each  time the Ctrl   key is pressed the retainer settings are changed in a defined sequence  First the  fraction of the cars set at a low pressure is selected  25   50  and then 100  of the cars   then  the fraction of the cars at a high pressure is selected instead  then the fraction at slow direct  For  the 25  setting the retainer is set on every fourth car starting at the rear of the train  50  sets  every other car and 100  sets every car  These changes can only be made when the train is  stopped  When the retainer is set to exhaust  the ENG file release rate value is used  otherwise the  pressures and release rates are hard coded based on some AB brake documentation used by the  Open Rails development team     8 7 Dynamically Evolving Tractive Force   The Open Rails development team has been experimenting with max continuous tractive force   where it can be dynamically altered during game play using the ORTSMaxTractiveForceCurves  parameter as shown earlier  The parameters were based on the Handbook of Railway Vehicle  Dynamics  This says the increased traction motor heat increase resistance which decreases  current and tractive force  We used a moving averag
75. MAN  train is in manual mode  only player train  see here   OOC  train is out of control  EXPL  train is in explorer mode  only player train     When relevant  this field also shows delay  in minutes   e g  S 05 mean Signal  mode  5 minutes delay     e Auth  End of  authorization  info   that is  the reason why the train is preparing to stop  or slow down   Possible reasons are      SPDL  speed limit imposed by speed sign     Page 63 of 206    SIGL  speed limit imposed by signal   STOP  signal set at state  STOP      REST  signal set at state  RESTRICTED   train is to reduce speed at approaching this  signal      EOA  end of authority   generally only occurs in non signaled routes or area  where  authority is based on NODE mode and not SIGNAL mode     STAT  station   TRAH  train ahead   EOR  end of train s route  or subroute in case the train approaches a reversal point     AUX  all other authorization types  including auxiliary action authorizations  e g  waiting  points      When the control mode is    NODE    the column    Auth    can show following strings   EOT  end of track  EOP  end of path  RSW  switch reserved by another train  LP  train is in loop  TAH  train ahead  MXD  free run for at least 5000 meters    NOP  no path reserved     When the control mode is    OOC    the column    Auth    can show following strings   SPAD  passed signal at danger  RSPD  passed signal at danger running backwards  OOAU  passed authority limit  OOPA  out of path  SLPP  slipped into pat
76. Own Computer  As any online game  you need to do some extra work if you want to host a multiplayer session     13 1 IP Address  If you are running at home and use a router  you may not have a permanent IP  Thus before you  start as a server  you must find your IP  The quickest ways are the following     1  Using Google  type in    find ip address     then Google will tell you    find ip address    Ad related to find ip address    IP Address Lookup   serviceobjects com  www serviceobjects com IP Lookup  Verify  amp  Geotarget Website Visitors via XML  Updates Data Hourly     our public IP address is 100 0 0 1 Learn more    2  If the above does not work  try http   whatismyipaddress com ip lookup   which shows your  IP in the middle of the page     Page 178 of 206    Lookup IP Address Location    This IP lookup tool is designed to provide additional information  about the entered IP address     These details include the hostname  Geographic location  information  includes country  region state  city  latitude  longitude  and telephone area code    and a location specific map     The geographic details are pulled from a commercially available  geolocation database  Geolocation technology can never be   100  accurate in providing the location of an IP address  When  the IP address is a proxy server and it does not expose the   user s IP address it is virtually impossible to locate the user  The  country accuracy is estimated at about 99   For IP addresses in  the United States  i
77. Pick Switches    are checked as default  You can uncheck  one of them when a signal and a switch are superimposed in a way that it is difficult to select the  desired item     You can click a switch  or signal  in the dispatcher window and press Ctrl Alt G to jump to that  switch with the free roam  8 key  camera     If you click on    View Self    the dispatcher window will center on the player train  However  if the  train moves  centering will be lost     You can select a train by left clicking with the mouse its green reproduction in the dispatcher  window  approximately half way between the train s head and its name string  The train body  becomes red  Then if you click on the button    See in game    the main Open Rails window will show  this train in the views for the 2  3  4 or 6 keys   and the 5 key view if available for this train    Display of the new train may require some time for OR to compute the new image if the train is far  away from the previous camera view     Take into account that continuous switching from train to train  especially if the trains are far away   can lead to memory overflows     If after a train selection you click on    Follow    the dispatcher window will remain centered on that  train     Page 48 of 206    7 6 Additional Train Operation Commands  OR supports an interesting range of additional train operation commands  Some significant ones  are described here below     7 6 1 Diesel Power On Off  With the key Y the player diesel engine i
78. Start   User name     6  open    V Logging Host port  30000 O  rails 7 windowed   Restor      Server Client    5 1 Installation Profiles  In the simplest case  where you have only a basic MSTS installation  see paragraph    Does Open  Rails need MSTS to run     for a precise definition of a MSTS installation  OR should already  correctly point to that  Installation  To check this  you should initially see under    Installation Profile     the string         Default        Under    Route    you should see the name of one of the MSTS routes in your  MSTS installation                                    You can easily add  remove or move other MSTS installations and select among them  e g  if you  have any so called    mini routes    installed    Click on the    Options    button and select the    Content     tab  See the    Content Options    discussed below for more instructions     5 2 Updating OR  When a new release of OR is available and your computer is online  a link    Update to xnnnn     appears in the upper right corner  The string    xnnnn    is the release number of the newest release  that matches your selected level of update  Various level of updates called Update Channels are  available  You may choose the desired level in the    Options Update    window  described below     Page 9 of 206    When you click on the update link OR will download and install the new release  In this way your  version of Open Rails is always up to date  Note  however  that previously sa
79. TSSteamFiremanMaxPossibleFiringRate  x    ENG Fabel ras Mass   Ibs  kg UK     3000Ib h alternate    42001b h     ae  can shovel in an US     50001b h value to   ORTSSteamFiremanMaxPossibleFiringRate  hour MSTS   2000kg h         Page 91 of 206          Indicates that the  locomotive has a                                     SteamFiremanlsMechanicalStoker   x   ENG pee nents  Factor Pern Taner Existing   SteamFiremanlsMechanicalStoker   1 0    stoker  and hence 1   stoker  a large rate of coal  feed   Steam Cylinder  N f st  NumCylinders   x   ENG al Factor As per loco specs Existing NumCylinders   2    3 Length of cylinder     APE CylinderStroke   26in    Cyl k EN D   A   Exist  ylinderStroke  x   G rake istance     m  in s per loco specs xisting CylinderStroke  0 8m      i Diameter of     ae CylinderDiameter   21in      D EN D   A   E  CylinderDiameter   x   G evlindet istance     m  in s per loco specs xisting CylindetDiameter  0 6m   Number of steam  F LP cylinders a    LPNumCylinders   x   ENG  Compound Factor As per loco specs Existing LPNumCylinders   2    locomotive only   Length of LP  z cylinder stroke 5   TES LPCylinderStroke   26in    LPCyl k EN D   A   E  CylinderStroke   x   G  Compound istance     m  in s per loco specs xisting LPCylinderStroke  0 8m    locomotive only   Diameter of LP  3   cylinder   er are LPCylinderDiameter   21in    LPCylinderDiameter   x   ENG  Compound Distance    m  in   As per loco specs Existing LPCylinderDiameter   0 6m    locomotive o
80. This file contains rich information about the execution of the game session  allowing  identification of critical problems  This file should always be attached to requests of support in  case of problems     The contents of the file are often self explanatory  and therefore can be evaluated by the same  contents developer  It includes reports of various errors in the MSTS files which are ignored by  OR  including missing sound files  unrecognized terms in some files  etc  Selecting the  Experimental Option  Show shape warnings    described here allows OR to report errors found in  shape files in the log file  It includes also reports about malfunctions in the gaming session  such  as trains passing red signals  as well as OR malfunctions     7 17 Code embedded Logging Options  OR source code is freely downloadable  check the www OpenRails org website for this  Within the  code there are some debug options that  when activated  generate specific extended log files  e g   for analysis of signal and of Al train behavior  Short specific info on this can be provided to people  with programming skills     7 18 Testing in Autopilot Mode  Autopilot mode is a powerful tool to help in testing activities     Page 69 of 206    8 Open Rails Physics   Open Rails physics is in an advanced stage of development  The physics structure is divided into  logical classes  more generic classes are parent classes  more specialized classes inherit  properties and methods of their parent class  Theref
81. Travelled  distance travelled   Gives an indication if all is well  If a train started an hour ago and    travelled    is still 0 0   something s clearly wrong     e Speed  present speed     e Max  maximum allowed speed     Page 62 of 206    e Al Mode  gives an indication of what the Al train is    doing      Possible states   INI  train is initializing  Normally you would not see this     STP  train is stopped other than in a station  The reason for the stop is shown in   Authority      BRK  train is preparing to stop  Does not mean it is actually braking  but it  knows  it  has to stop  or at least reduce speed  soon     Reason  and distance to the related position  are shown in  Authority  and   Distance      ACC  train is accelerating  either away from a stop or because of a raise in allowed  speed     RUN  train is running at allowed speed     FOL  train is following another train in the same signal section   Its speed is now derived from the speed of the train ahead     STA  train is stopped in station   WTP  train is stopped at waiting point   EOP  train is approaching end of path     STC  train is Static train  or train is in Inactive mode if waiting for next action     e Al data   shows throttle  first three digits  and brake  last three digits  positions when  Al train is running  but shows departure time  booked  when train is stopped at station  or waiting point  or shows activation time when train is in inactive mode  state STC      e Mode   SIGN  signal   NODE  
82. a  SSS  CODE WORD   Clas      yt    28  sf    x  gt  gt     oye e  del del del oe  RES  ffi pig  EL   38     E a ug  SS  S  eh  el cece  ce  av  Ss FES     4 3 sek 3 135 ales lan at  Sa   ga   te  29  a  amp  jf    fF CAs      hs ee     ly  Seley   8s  Ss  ss   zs      f  zi          Matchlock   8 28 C 17x2   66  180  16 080 70 000  102 000 7   6      21  5     3500  1720  805  485 335   245   45 90  60  Matelas sc 18x24 G6 180  18 020 77 000 115 000  7   6      21   6    14000 1930  900  545  375  275   165  105  65  Matelasser 8 32 C 19x24   66   180 20 070 85 000 128 000 8   0      22 11    45002140  1000  605   415   305   185   115  75  Matellarum S U C 20x24   66   ISO  22 260 92 000 136 000  8   6      23   4     50002315  1085  655   450   330   200   125   80    Typically the ruling gradient is defined as the maximum uphill grade facing a train in a particular  section of the route  and this grade would typically determine the maximum permissible load that  the train could haul in this section  The permissible load would vary depending upon the direction  of travel of the train     Page 83 of 206    8 4 1 2 Elements of Steam Locomotive Operation    A steam locomotive is a very complex piece of machinery that has many component parts  each of  which will influence the performance of the locomotive in different ways  Even at the peak of its  development in the middle of the 20th century  the locomotive designer had at their disposal only a  series of factors and simple
83. ails   Open Rails software  OR  is a community developed and maintained project from openrails org  Its  objective is to create a new transport simulator platform that is first  compatible with routes   activities  consists  locomotives  and rolling stock created for Microsoft Train Simulator  MSTS   and  secondly  a platform for future content creation freed of the constraints of MSTS  in this manual  MSTS means MSTS with MSTS Bin extensions  if not explicitly stated in a different way      Our goal is to enhance the railroad simulation hobby through a community designed and  supported platform built to serve as a lasting foundation for an accurate and immersive simulation  experience  By making the source code of the platform freely available under the GPL license  we  ensure that OR software will continually evolve to meet the technical  operational  graphical  and  content building needs of the community  Open architecture ensures that our considerable  investment in building accurate representations of routes and rolling stock will not become  obsolete  Access to the source code eliminates the frustration of undocumented behavior and  simplifies understanding the internal operation of the simulator without the time consuming trial  and error prone experimentation typically needed today     Open Rails software is just what the name implies     a railroad simulation platform that   s open for  inspection  open for continuous improvement  open to third parties and commercia
84. ain  you desire to run as the Player train  Season and weather can also be selected     Page 11 of 206    5 4 3 Run    Now  click on    Start     and OR will start loading the data needed for your game  When loading  completes you will be within the cab of your locomotive  You can read further in the chapter     Driving a Train       5 4 4 Multiplayer Mode   Open Rails also features this exciting game mode  several players  each one on a different  computer in a local network or through the Internet  can play together  each driving a train and  seeing the trains of the other players  even interacting with them by exchanging wagons  under the  supervision of a player that acts as dispatcher  The multiplayer mode is described in detail here     5 4 5 Replay   This is not a real gaming mode  but it is nevertheless another way to experience OR  After having  run a game you can save it and replay it  OR will save all the commands that you gave  and will  automatically execute the commands during replay  it s like you are seeing a video on how you  played the game  Replay is described later together with the save and resume functions     Page 12 of 206    6 Open Rails Options    Clicking on the    Options    button opens a multi panel window  The Menu  gt  Options panels contain  the settings which remain in effect during your simulation  Most of the options are self explanatory   you may set them according to your preference and system configuration  For example  you can  turn off
85. an  be added even if they are not always available     Click on the    Add    button  and locate the desired installation  OR will automatically enter a  proposed name in the    Name     window that will appear in the    Installation set     window on the  main menu form  Modify the name if desired  then Click    Save    to add the new path and name to  Open Rails  Then click    OK    to return to Open Rails     To remove an entry  note that this does not remove the installation itself   select the entry in the  window  and click    Delete     then    OK    to close the window  To modify an entry  use the    Browse        button to access the location  make the necessary changes  and then    Save    the changes     Page 27 of 206    6 9 Updater Options  These options control which OR version update channel is active  see also here   The various    options available are self explanatory   Options    General   Audio   Video   Simulation   Keyboard   Data logger   Evaluation   Content Updater   Experimental    Update channel        Release channel  Recommended for users     The release channel contains only official  hand picked stable versions         Experimental channel  For supporters   The experimental channel contains automatically generated weekly versions     Nightly channel  For developers     The nightly channel contains every single version created        None    No automatic updates        Page 28 of 206    6 10 Experimental Options    Some experimental features bein
86. antek  Aethra  Aethra Starvoice  AGK Nordic  Airlink  Airlink 101  Airlink   AirLive  Airnet  AirTies  Alcatel Lucent  Alice   Alice Box    AIBICIDIEIFIGIHIIIJIKILIMIN  OIPIQIRISITIUIVIWIXIZ    A    Allied Data  Allied Telesyn  AllNet  Ambit  Ansel  Aolynk  AOpen   AP Router  Apple  Arris  Artnet  Asante  Asmax  Asus   Ativa   ATnT  AusLinx  AWB Networks  Axess Tel  Axesstel  AZiO  Aztech    3  A page may appear allowing you to select your specific model of router     Airlink Port Forwarding Guides    Select your router model from the list below     Rt210W    Page 180 of 206    4  It then shows all the programs  games  for which you want to forward ports  Just click    Default  Guide        Port Forwarding for the Airlink Rt210W    Welcome to our guide list for the Airlink Rt210W  Please select the program  you are forwarding ports for from the list below     If you do not feel like figuring out how to forward ports manually  we have a  simple software solution called PFConfig that can forward your ports for you  automatically  We offer complete support for our product and will help you get  your ports forwarded     If peer Sabhe program you are forwarding ports for  be sure to visit  fur Default Guide fothis router    AIBICIDIEIFIGIHIIJIKILIMIN  OIPIQIRISITIUIVIWIXIYIZ    A  1AV Streamer Alpha Centauri  1st SMTP Server Americas Army  3 In A Bed Amplitude  3CX Anarchy Online BETA  TLinks PX 3615 675 Apache  A Valley Without Wind APB  ABC Apple Remote Desktop  Access Remote PC
87. any car  one speed of operation at  which the car trucks have no more tendency to run toward either rail than they have on straight  track  where both rail heads are at the same level  known as the equilibrium speed   At lower  speeds the trucks tend constantly to run down against the inside rail of the curve  and thereby  increase the flange friction  whilst at higher speeds they run toward the outer rail  with the same  effect  This may be made clearer by reference to Fig  2  which represents the forces which operate    Page 103 of 206    on a car at its centre of gravity  With the car at rest on the curve there is a component of the  weight W which tends to move the car down toward the inner rail  When the car moves along the  track centrifugal force Fe comes into play and the car action is controlled by the force Fr which is  the resultant of W and Fc  The force Fr likewise has a component which  still tends to move the  car toward the inner rail  This tendency persists until  with increasing speed  the value of Fe  becomes great enough to cause the line of operation of Fr to coincide with the centre line of the  track perpendicular to the plane of the rails  At this equilibrium speed there is no longer any  tendency of the trucks to run toward either rail  If the speed be still further increased  the  component of Fr rises again  but now on the opposite side of the centre line of the track and is of  opposite sense  causing the trucks to tend to move toward the outer ins
88. area sq m   y   density of air    1 2 kg m   Rt     tunnel perimeter  m   Lir    length of train  m  Lt     length of tunnel  m   V    train velocity  m s  P   locomotive mass  tonne   G   train mass  tonne  Wt     additional aerodynamic drag in tunnel  N KN                 Source  Reasonable compensation coefficient of maximum gradient in long railway tunnels by Sirong YI   Liangtao  NIE  Yanheng CHEN  Fangfang QIN    Page 114 of 206    8 13 Tunnel Friction   Application in OR  for content developers   To enable this calculation capability it is necessary to select the    Tunnel dependent resistance     option on the Open Rails Menu  The implication of tunnel resistance is designed to model the  relative impact  and does not take into account multiple trains in the tunnel at the same time     Tunnel resistance values can be seen in the Train Forces HUD   The default tunnel profile is determined by the route speed recorded in the TRK file     8 13 1 OR Parameters    The following parameters maybe included in the TRK file to overwrite standard default values used  by Open Rails     ORTSSingleTunnelArea   x      Cross section area of single track tunnel     units area  ORTSSingleTunnelPerimeter   x     Perimeter of single track tunnel     units distance  ORTSDoubleTunnelArea   x     Cross section area of double track tunnel     units area    ORTSDoubleTunnelPerimeter   x     Perimeter of double track tunnel     units distance    To insert these values in the  trk file  it is su
89. aries due to changing track conditions     Theoretical tractive effort is determined by the boiler pressure  cylinder size  drive  wheel diameters  and will vary between locomotives     Low Factors of Adhesion will cause the locomotive   s driving wheels to slip     Forces Impacting Train Movement    The steam locomotive is a heat engine which converts heat energy generated through the burning  of fuel  such as coal  into heat and ultimately steam  The steam is then used to do work by  injecting the steam into the cylinders to drive the wheels around and move the locomotive forward   To understand how a train will move forward  it is necessary to understand the principal  mechanical forces acting on the train  The diagram below shows the two key forces affecting the  ability of a train to move        Tractive  Effort         Train Force   N or Lbf     Train  Resistance         Train Speed     km h or mph     The first force is the tractive effort produced by the locomotive  whilst the second force is the    Page 80 of 206    resistance presented by the train  Whenever the tractive effort is greater than the train resistance  the train will continue to move forward  once the resistance exceeds the tractive effort  then the  train will start to slow down  and eventually will stop moving forward     The sections below describe in more detail the forces of tractive effort and train resistance   Train Resistance    The movement of the train is opposed by a number of different forc
90. as  e g   Curtius Kniffler or Kother  The D parameter is used in the advanced adhesion model described  later     From A  B and C a coefficient CK is computed  and the adhesion force limit is then calculated by  multiplication of CK by the car mass and the acceleration of gravity  9 81   as better explained  later     The adhesion limit is only considered in the adhesion model of locomotives     The adhesion model is calculated in two possible ways  The first one    the simple adhesion model      is based on a very simple threshold condition and works similarly to the MSTS adhesion model   The second one     the advanced adhesion model     is a dynamic model simulating the real world  conditions on a wheel to rail contact and will be described later  The advanced adhesion model  uses some additional parameters such as     e ORTSAdhesion   ORTSSlipWarningThreshold   T      where T is the wheelslip  percentage considered as a warning value to be displayed to the driver     e ORTSAdhesion  Wheelset   Axle   ORTSInertia   Inertia           where Inertia is the  model inertia in kg m  and can be set to adjust the advanced adhesion model  dynamics  The value considers the inertia of all the axles and traction drives  If not  set  the value is estimated from the locomotive mass and maximal power     The first model  simple adhesion model   is a simple tractive force condition based computation  If  the tractive force reaches its actual maximum  the wheel slip is indicated in HUD vie
91. ass over  the same track sections  The incorporated train must not have waiting points nor station stops in  the common path part  the coupled train instead may have them   If there are reversals within the  common path part  they must be present in both paths    7  At the point of decoupling the number of cars and locomotives to be decoupled from the train  can be different from the number of the original train    8  The whole train part to be decoupled must lie on the same track section  After decoupling  the   incorporated  train returns to being a standard Al train    9  Manual decoupling  for player trains  occurs using the F9 window  automatic decoupling occurs  with the 4NNSS and 5NNSS commands  see previous paragraph   the first one has to be used  when the part to be decoupled is at the rear of the train  and the second one where the part is at  the front of the train    10  In the standard case where the main part of the train continues in the same direction  the  following cases can occur     If the decoupled part is on the front  this decoupled part can only proceed further in the same  direction  ahead of the main part of the train   To avoid it starting immediately after  decoupling  it is wise to set a WP of some tens of seconds in the path of the decoupled train   This WP can be set at the beginning of the section where decoupling occurs  OR will move it  under the decoupled part  so you don t need to be precise in positioning it     If the decoupled part is o
92. atcher compares the paths of the trains to identify  possible passing points and then reserves tracks for a train up until a passing point  When a train  gets near the next passing point the reservation is extended to the next one  The end result is that  in Timetable Mode an Al train cannot be placed on a track if that section of track is already  occupied by or reserved for another train  A section of track is any track bounded by either a  switch or a signal     Also  a train is not created if it would be partly or fully superimposed on an already existing train  or  if its path is not long enough for it  This applies to both Timetable Mode and Activity Mode     7 15 6 Extended HUD for Debug Information  The last extended HUD display shows Debug information     The first line     Logging enabled     refers to logging as described in paragraphs 6 6 and 6 7     A wide variety of parameters is shown  from frame wait and render speeds in milliseconds  to  number of primitives  Process Thread resource utilization and number of Logical CPUs from the  system   s bios  They are very useful in case of OR stuttering  to find out where the bottleneck is     DEBUG INFORMATION   Logging enabled False   Build 0 0 4937 35482  2013 07 08419 42 44Z    Memory 270 MB  110 textu 1153materials 63 shapes 9 tiles 25 MB managed  1134 1003 11 GCs   CPU 13   4 logical processors    GPU 31 FPS  332  47 dern model 3    Adapter ATI Mobility Radeon HD 01512 MB    Shadow maps   56 111 177 24 958378 530 
93. ate a locomotive with the own engine off and the helper   s engine on     8 2 1 4 ORTS Specific Diesel Engine Definition    If no ORTS specific definition is found  a single diesel engine definition is created based on the  MSTS settings  Since MSTS introduces a model without any data crosscheck  the behavior of  MSTS and ORTS diesel locomotives can be very different  In MSTS  MaxPower is not considered  in the same way and you can get much    better    performance than expected  In ORTS  diesel  engines cannot be overloaded     No matter which engine definition is used  the diesel engine is defined by its load characteristics    Page 74 of 206     maximum output power vs  speed  for optimal fuel flow and or mechanical characteristics  output  torque vs  speed  for maximum fuel flow  The model computes output power   torque according to  these characteristics and the throttle settings  If the characteristics are not defined  as they are in    Relative Power Output       m   N    Relative power       Relative torque    j         oo        A    RELATIVE POWER AND TORQUE              Nw o     0   IdleRPM 110  Max RPM    ENGINE SPEED  RPM     the example below   they are calculated based on the MSTS data and common normalized  characteristics     In many cases the throttle vs  speed curve is customized because power vs  speed is not linear  A  default linear throttle vs  speed characteristics is built in to avoid engine overloading at lower  throttle settings  Nevertheless  it is
94. ated within  the main folder of the locomotive     2  If the  cvf file cannot be found in the CABVIEWSD folder  the 3D cab is associated with the  cvf  file of the 2D cab     3  Instruments are named with the same conventions as 2D cabs  i e  FRONT _HLIGHT   SPEEDOMETER  etc     4  A cab can have multiple instances of the same instruments  for example multiple clocks or  speedometers     5  Instruments are sorted based on the order of their appearance in the  cvf file  for example  SPEEDOMETER 0 corresponds to the first speedometer in the  cvf file  SPEEDOMETER 1  corresponds to the second one     6  An instrument can have multiple subgroups to make the animation realistic  for example   TRAIN_BRAKE 0 0 and TRAIN_BRAKE 0 1 belong to the instrument TRAIN_ BRAKE 0   However  if the instrument is a digital device  the second number will be used to indicate the font  size used  for example SPEEDOMETER 1 14 means the second speedometer  which is digital  as defined in  cvf  will be rendered with 14pt font  This may be changed in future OR releases   The important information for a digital device is its location  thus it can be defined as an object  with a small single face in the 3D model     7  Animation ranges must be in agreement with the  cvf file    8  Within the Wagon section of the  eng file a block like the following one has to be generated     ORTS3DCab    ORTS3DCabFile   Cab s    ORTS3DCabHeadPos    0 9 2 4 5 2      RotationLimit   40 60 0    StartDirection  12 00       
95. ath  and then they split and run further each on its  own path  in the same direction or in opposite directions      This can have e g  the following example applications     Application 1     apair of helper locomotives couples to the rear or to the front of a long train     the resulting train runs uphill     when they arrived uphill  the helper locomotives uncouple from the train       if the helpers were coupled to the rear of the other train  the train continues forward on its  path  while the helper locomotives return downhill       If the helpers were coupled to the front  the helpers will enter a siding and stop  the train will  continue forward on its path  and when the train has passed  the helpers can reverse and  return downhill    This means that a complete helper cycle can be simulated     Application 2     a passenger train is formed from two parts that join  e g  two sections of a HST      the train reaches an intermediate station and the two sections decouple     one section takes the main line  while the other one takes a branch line  this can happen in  any direction for both trains      While the joining train  the one that moves and couples to the other train   the joined train     must be an Al train at the moment  the joined train may be either an Al train or a player train   autopiloted or not      Page 136 of 206    Activity development     1  The two trains start as separate trains  couple together and decouple later in the game   After  that of cour
96. booked to start after midnight will instead be started at the beginning of the  day   As a result of these rules  it is not really possible to run an activity around or through midnight with  all required Al trains included     11 5 7 Known Problems  e  f a  dispose command is processed for the player train   and the new train runs in the  opposite direction  the reverser will  jump  to the reverse state on forming that new train     e A run round command defined in a  dispose command cannot yet be processed  It will be  necessary to switch to Manual to perform that run round     e  f two trains are to be placed on a single siding using  create with  ahead qualifier  but the  trains have paths in opposite directions  the trains may be placed in incorrect positions     e  f the  binary qualifier is set for  path  but the OpenRails subdirectory in the Paths directory  does not exist  the program will not be able to load any paths     Page 169 of 206    11 6 Example of a Timetable File  Here is an excerpt of a timetable file  shown in Excel                OR SurflinerTimetable xlsx   OpenOffice org  File Modifica Visualizza Inserisci Formato Strumenti Dati Finestra      B BULARREAN VE  KSG    O S CONN by MOE                        Bd Calibri Flu     6CS   228 Hw VRR EE O  ES a ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a eee   2 frommen ECS i  3 fronti ST_MESAC  OCNN TT_QCNN COMM  LAX12 i    4 fon Metro_6 Metro_SPush    6 esta 4 37 4 55 5     22  oc 4 39 5 16    24      25 fsa 5 02 5 39    26 Is 5 11
97. can only be modified by editing the contents of  the  cvf file   The headout views  if available  are selected by    Home     right hand side   looking forward  or    End     left hand side  looking back  and the headout view direction  is controlled by the mouse with the right button depressed     Page 51 of 206    e Key Alt 1 opens the 3D driver s view  if the locomotive has a 3D cabview file  from the  interior of the controlling cab of the player locomotive  The camera position and view  direction are fully player controllable     Rotation of the camera view in any direction is controlled by the mouse with the right hand  button depressed  or alternatively by the four arrow keys   The camera   s position is moved  forward or backward along the train axis with the PageUp and PageDown keys  and moved  left or right or up or down with Alt   the four arrow keys  The headout views  if available  are  selected by    Home     right hand side  looking forward  or    End     left hand side  looking back   and the outside view direction is controlled by the mouse with the right button depressed     e Keys 2 and 3 open exterior views that move with the active train  these views are  centered on a particular    target    car in the train  The target car or locomotive can be  changed by pressing Alt PageUp to select a target closer to the head of the train and  Alt PgDown to select a target toward the rear  The 2 View selects the train   s head  end as the initial target  the 3 View t
98. cific signaling functions are available  Sigcfg and sigscr files referring to  these functions must be located as described in the previous paragraph     10 15 1 SPEED Signals     a New Signal Function Type  The SPEED signal function type allows a signal object marker to be used as a speed sign     Page 138 of 206    The advantages of such a use are      e The signal object marker only applies to the track on which it is placed  Original speed  signs always also affect any nearby lines  making it difficult and sometimes impossible  to set a specific speed limit on just one track in complex areas     e Asa signal object  the SPEED signal can have multiple states defined and a script  function to select the required state  e g  based on route selection  This allows  different speed limits to be defined for different routes through the area  e g  no limit  for the main line but specific limits for a number of diverging routes     The SPEED signal is fully processed as a speed limit and not as a signal  and it has no effect on  any other signals     Limitation   it is not possible to define different speeds related to type of train  passenger or  freight      10 15 2 Definition and Usage  The definition is similar to that of any other signal  with SignalFnType set to  SPEED      It allows the definition of drawstates and aspects like any other signal  Different speed values can  be defined per aspect as normal     An aspect can be set to not have an active speed limit  If this as
99. claim is made if  the train ahead is also stopped     No distinctions are made between types of train  and there are no priority rules     10 5 Deadlock Processing   When a train is started  it will check its path against all other trains  including those not yet  started   If a section is found on which this train and the other train are due in opposite directions   the boundaries of that total common section are determined  and    deadlock traps    are set at those  boundaries  for each train in the appropriate direction  These boundaries are always switch nodes   When a train passes a node which has a    deadlock trap    for that train  the trap is sprung  When a  train approaches a node which has an active deadlock  it will stop at that node  or at the last signal  ahead of it if there is one  This train will now also spring its deadlock traps  and will claim the full  common section of that deadlock to ensure it will be the next train allowed onto that section  The  deadlock traps are removed when a train passes the end node of a deadlock section     When a train is started  and the train   s path includes one or more reversal points  deadlocks are  only checked for the part of the path up to the first reversal point  On reversal  deadlocks are  checked for the next part  etc      Deadlock traps are removed when a train switches to Manual mode  When the train switches back  to Auto mode  the deadlock check is performed again     There are no deadlock checks in Explorer M
100. core is used to separate the numbers  as the LOD export tool does not support the use of colons in object names when exporting  More  on this later     The speed does not display where the face for the SPEEDOMETER object is located but where  the    pivot point    for the SPEEDOMETER object is located  Normally you would place the  SPEEDOMETER object somewhere in the cab where it will not be seen     With the  SPEEDOMETER_0_14  object selected in gmax  go to the  Hierarchy     tab  select    Affect  Pivot Only  and click  Align to World    to reset the orientation to world coordinates  Then use the     Select and Move  tool to move the pivot to where in the cab you wish the numerals to appear  As  you have aligned the pivot point to World coordinates the numerals will display vertically  As most  locomotive primary displays are normally angled you may have to rotate the pivot point so that it  aligns with the angle of the    display screen        Export the  S file for the cab as per normal     You will then have to uncompress the  s file for the cab using Shape File Manager or the  S file  decompression tool of your choice     Then open the  S file with a text editor and search for the letters  speed  until you find the first  instance of SPEEDOMETER_0_14 and change it to be SPEEDOMETER 0 14  Search again and  find the second instance of SPEEDOMETER_014 and change that also to  SPEEDOMETER 0 14  Save the  S file in the text editor     Now just one more thing  Download the DF
101. created in a  minimized state  so to display it in front of the OR window you must click on    Alt Tab    and select  the dispatcher window icon  or click on one of the OR icons in the taskbar  If you are running OR  in full screen mode  you must also have the    Fast full screen Alt Tab    option selected to have both  the OR and the dispatcher windows displayed at the same time  After the dispatcher window has  been selected with Alt Tab  successive Alt_Tabs will toggle between the OR window and the  dispatcher window     The dispatcher window is resizable and can also be maximized  e g  on a second display  You can  define the level of zoom either by changing the value within the    Res    box or by using the mouse  wheel  You can pan through the route by moving the mouse while pressing the left button  You  can hold the shift key while clicking the mouse in a place in the map  this will quickly zoom in with  that place in focus  You can hold Ctrl while clicking the mouse in a place in the map  which will  zoom out to show the whole route  Holding Alt and clicking will zoom out to show part of the route     a9 DispatchViewer oo  Res  2001 24m       I Draw Path          I Pick Signals  IV Pick Switches    See in Game            Follow       po    Reg iwda Lecco_Monza            RS Manovracorta    A  ce  P Sud   staManovra  gt     AstaManovracorta    Page 47 of 206    The dispatcher window shows the route layout and monitors the movement of all trains  While the  player trai
102. cteristics to get results that are more precise     8 3 Electric Locomotives  At the present time  diesel and electric locomotive physics calculations use the default engine  physics  Default engine physics simply uses the MaxPower and MaxForce parameters to  determine the pulling power of the engine  modified by the Reverser and Throttle positions  The  locomotive physics can be replaced by traction characteristics  speed in mps vs  force in Newtons   as described below     Some OR specific parameters are available in order to improve the realism of the electric system   Since the simulator does not know whether the pantograph in the 3D model is up or down  you  can set some additional parameters in order to add a delay between the time when the command  to raise the pantograph is given and when the pantograph is actually up     In order to do this  you can write in the Wagon section of your  eng file or  wag file  since the  pantograph may be on a wagon  this optional structure        ORTSPantographs    Pantograph    lt  lt  This is going to be your first pantograph   Delay  5 s    lt  lt  Example   a delay of 5 seconds     Pantograph        parameters for the second pantograph            Other parameters will be added to this structure later  such as power limitations or speed    restrictions     Page 78 of 206    By default  the circuit breaker of the train closes as soon as power is available on the pantograph   In real life  the circuit breaker does not close instantly 
103. d by a train    However  because of the logic as described above  if set for a station which has both terminal  platforms as well as through platforms  trains with paths continuing through those platforms  will have the normal stop positions     11 4 7 6 Dispose Commands     Dispose commands can be set in the  dispose row to define what is to be done with the train after  it has terminated    See special notes below on the behaviour of the player train when it is formed out of another train  by a dispose command  or when the player train itself has a dispose command      forms  Syntax    forms  lt train gt   runround  lt path gt   rrime time  setstop     forms defines which new train is to be formed out of this train when the train terminates    The consist of the new train is formed out of the consist of the terminating train and any  consist definition for the new train is ignored    The new train will be    static    until the time as defined in  start row for that train  This means  that the new train will not try to clear its path  signals etc   and will not move even if it is not in  a station    If the incoming train is running late  and its arrival time is later as the start time of the new  train  the start of the new train is also delayed but the new train will immediately become  active as soon as it is formed    For locomotive hauled trains  it can be defined that the engine s  must run round the train in  order for the train to move in the opposite direction  The
104. d the train is due to be held  a special check is performed to  ensure the rear of the train is not in the path of the referenced train or  if it is  the referenced  train has already cleared that position  Otherwise  a deadlock would result  with the  referenced train not being able to pass the train which is waiting for it     Command value   referenced train  this is compulsory     Command qualifiers      maxdelay n   n is the maximum delay  in minutes  of the referenced train for which the  wait is still valid   This delay is compensated by any delay of the train which is to wait  e g  if maxdelay  is 5 minutes  the referenced train has a delay of 8 minutes but this train itself has a  delay of 4 minutes  the compensated delay is 4 minutes and thus the wait is still  valid   This parameter is optional  if not set a maxdelay of 0 minutes is set as default      owndelay   n  n is delay in minutes   the owndelay qualifier command makes the  command valid only if the train in question is delayed by at least the total minutes as set  for the owndelay qualifier    This can be used to hold a late running train such that is does not cause additional  delays to other trains  in particular on single track sections      waitany    Syntax    waitany  lt path gt   both  This command will set a wait for any train which is on the path section as defined     If the qualifier  both is set  the wait will be applied for any train regardless of its direction   otherwise the wait is set only 
105. d train for which the  wait is still valid     This delay is compensated for any delay of the train which is to wait  e g  if maxdelay is 5  minutes  the referenced train has a delay of 8 minutes but this train itself has a delay of 4  minutes  the compensated delay is 4 minutes and so the wait is still valid    This parameter is optional  if not set a maxdelay of 0 minutes is set as default      notstarted   the wait will also be applied if the referenced train has not yet started     Page 160 of 206     owndelay   n  n is delay in minutes   the owndelay qualifier command makes the  command valid only if the train in question is delayed by at least the total minutes as set  for the owndelay qualifier    This can be used to hold a late running train such that is does not cause additional  delays to other trains  in particular on single track sections      follow    Syntax    follow  lt train gt   maxdelay n  owndelay n    This command is very similar to the  wait command  but in this case it is applied to each  common section of both trains beyond a part of the route which was not common    The train is controlled such that at each section where the paths of the trains re join after a  section which was not common  the train will only proceed if the referenced train has passed  that position  The command therefore works as a  wait which is repeated for each such  section    The command can only be set for trains routed in the same direction    When a wait location is found an
106. d volume    scroll button allows adjustment of the volume of OR sound     Page 17 of 206    6 3 Video Options  x        General   Audio Video   simulation   Keyboard   Data logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater   Experimental    IV Dynamic shadows   IV Fast full screen alt tab   IV Glass onin game windows   IV Model instancing     Overhead wire   J Vertical sync    fo     cab 2D stretch    a    2000     Viewing distance  m   J Distant mountains  10 2  Viewing distance  km      40   Viewing vertical FOV 40   vertical FOV is the same as   53   horizontal FOV on 4 3    10    World object density 71   horizontal FOV on 16 9     1280x1024     Window size    Ambient daylightbrightness       6 3 1 Dynamic shadows   With this option it is possible to enable or disable the display of dynamic shadows  Disabling can  be helpful if low frame rates are experienced    6 3 2 Fast full screen alt tab    When this option is selected  and OR is running full screen  pressing Alt Tab leaves OR full   screen and running  and allows the Dispatcher Window to be shown in front of it  If this option is  not selected  OR is minimized  The Dispatcher Window option must also be selected and the  Dispatcher Window started with Ctrl 9 to display the Dispatcher Window  Each successive press  of Alt Tab will toggle between the Dispatcher window and the OR window    6 3 3 Glass on in game windows  When this option is checked  the in game windows are displayed in a semitransparent mode     6 3 4 Model insta
107. diate angle cocks to permit the air pressure to gradually  approach the same pressure in the entire hose  This models the operations performed by the train  crew  The HUD display changes to show the new condition of the brake hose connections and  angle cocks     BRAKE INFORMATION   Main reservoir 134 psi   Car Type BrkCyl AuxRes ErgRes MRPipe RetValve TripleValve Handbrk Conn AnglCock BleedOff  0 0 1P 35 psi 84 psi 84 psi Emergency T A  B    A  B     0 1 1P 35 psi 84 psi 84 psi Emergency     32884   0 1P 0 psi 63 psi 63 psi Release 0    A  B           32884   1 1P 0 psi 63 psi 63 psi Release 0   32884   2 1P 0 psi 63 psi 63 psi Release 0     A  B   A  B        All of the hoses are now connected  only the angle cocks on the lead locomotive and the last car  are closed as indicated by the          The rest of the cocks are open           and the air hoses are joined  together  all    I     to connect to the air supply on the lead locomotive     Upon connection of the hoses of the new cars  recharging of the train brake line commences   Open Rails uses a default charging rate of about 1 minute per every 12 cars  The HUD display  may report that the consist is in    Emergency    state  this is because the air pressure dropped when  the empty car brake systems were connected  Ultimately the brake pressures reach their stable  values     Page 99 of 206    BRAKE INFORMATION   Main reservoir 140 psi   Car Type BrkCyl BrkPipe AuxRes ErgRes MRPipe RetValve TripleValve Handbrk Conn Ang
108. e    Timetable    is selected in the menu  Then the desired  timetable file must be selected in the    Timetable set    display     After selecting the required timetable  a list of all trains contained in that timetable is displayed and  the required train can be selected     Season and weather can also be selected  these are not preset within the timetable definition     11 3 Timetable Definition  11 3 1 General  A timetable consists of a list of trains  and  per train  the required timing of these trains  The timing  can be limited to just the start time  or it can include intermediate times as well     At present  intermediate timings are limited to    platform  locations as created using the MSTS  Route Editor     Each column in the spreadsheet contains data for a train and each row represents a location  A  cell at the intersection of a train and location contains the timing data for that particular train at that  location     Special rows and columns can be defined for general information or control commands   The first row for each column contains the train definition    The first column for each row contains the location definition    The cell at the intersection of the first row and first column must be empty     This paragraph only lists the main outline  full detailed description will follow in the next  paragraphs     11 3 2 Column definitions  A column is defined by the contents of the first row     Default  the first row defines the train name    Special column
109. e and any Saves of the same age or older will be of no further value and will be marked  as invalid automatically  e g  the 3 entry in the list   The button in the bottom left corner of the  menu deletes all the invalid Saves for all activities in Open Rails     7 14 Save and Replay  As well as resuming from a Save  you can also replay it just like a video  All the adjustments you  made to the controls  e g  opening the throttle  are repeated at the right moment to re create the  activity  As well as train controls  changes to the cameras are also repeated     Just like a  black box flight recorder  Open Rails is permanently in recording mode  so you can  save a recording at any time just by pressing F2 Save     Normally  you would choose the replay option by Menu  gt  Resume  gt  Replay from start     Page 57 of 206          A second option Menu  gt  Resume  gt  Replay from previous save lets you play back a shortened  recording  It resumes from the most recent Save it can find and replays from that point onwards   You might use it to play back a 5 minute segment which starts an hour into an activity     A warning is given when the replay starts and a replay countdown appears in the F5 Head Up    Display   Warning    a Sd    08 35 00 Replay started  en    ng at 08 35 after 00 00 11    Countdown    Version  Time  Replay  Speed  Acceleration  Direction    Throttle    Train brake  Boiler pressure  Steam generation  Steam us          08 35 02   00 00 09   0 0mph   0 000  m s s  
110. e four arrow keys  Successive presses of  the 5 key will move the view to successive views  if they exist  within the active train   Note that the    active train    may be an Al train selected by Ctrl 9     e Key 6 is the brakeman   s view     the camera is assumed to be at either end of the train   selected by AlttHome and Alt End  Rotation is controlled by the arrow keys or mouse  with right button depressed  There is no brakeman   s view for a single locomotive     e Key 8 is the free camera view  the camera starts from the current Key 2 or Key 3 view  position  and moves forward  PageUp key  or back  PageDown key  along the view  direction  The direction is controlled by the arrow keys or the mouse with right button  depressed  The speed of motion is controlled by the Shift  increase  or Ctrl  decrease     Page 52 of 206    keys  Open Rails saves the position of previous Key 8 views and can recall them by  repeatedly pressing Shift 8     e Ctrl 9 is an ORTS feature  it controls the target train for the Key 2  3  4  5 and 6 views  during activities or timetable operations  If there is more than one active train or there  are consists declared in the activity for pickup  pressing this key combination will set  the view to display each train or consist in turn  To return to the player train  press the  9 key  There may be a delay for each change of view as Open Rails calculates the  new image  The cab view and data values in the F4 window always remain with the  Player trai
111. e is  set to the    lower    head     Route selection is through  dummy  DISTANCE type route selection signals     Signal definition      SignalType   SL_J_40_ LAC    SignalFnType  NORMAL     SignalLightTex    bltex      SigFlashDuration  0 5 0 5     SignalLights   8   SignalLight   0  Red Light    Position  0 6 3 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   1  Amber Light   Position  06 3 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   2  Green Light   Position  0 6 3 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   3  Red Light   Position  0 4 5 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   4  Amber Light   Position  0 4 5 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   5  Green Light   Position  0 4 5 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   6  Amber Light   Position  0 2 7 0 11    Radius   0 125          SignalLight   7  White Light   Position  0 2 7 0 11    Radius   0 125             SignalDrawStates   8  SignalDrawState   0   Red   DrawLights   1  DrawLight   0            SignalDrawState   1   TopYellow   DrawLights   1  DrawLight   1             SignalDrawState   2   TopGreen   DrawLights   1    Page 142 of 206    DrawLight   2             SignalDrawState   3   TopYellowMidGreen   DrawLights   2   DrawLight   1    DrawLight   5            SignalDrawState   4   MidYellow   DrawLights   2   DrawLight   0    DrawLight   4            SignalDrawState  5   MidGreen   DrawLights   2  DrawLight   0    DrawLight   5             SignalDrawState   6   LowYellow   DrawLights   3   
112. e of the actual tractive force to approximate  the heat in the motors  Tractive force is allowed to be at the maximum per the ENG file  if the  average heat calculation is near zero  If the average is near the continuous rating than the tractive  force is de rated to the continuous rating  There is a parameter called ContinuousForceTimeFactor  that roughly controls the time over which the tractive force is averaged  The default is 1 800  seconds     8 8 Curve Resistance   Theory  8 8 1 Introduction  When a train travels around a curve  due to the track resisting the direction of travel  i e  the train  wants to continue in a straight line   it experiences increased resistance as it is    pushed    around  the curve  Over the years there has been much discussion about how to accurately calculate  curve friction  The calculation methodology presented  and used in OR  is meant to be  representative of the impacts that curve friction will have on rolling stock performance     Page 102 of 206    8 8 2 Factors Impacting Curve Friction  A number of factors impact upon the value of resistance that the curve presents to the trains  movement  as follows     e Curve radius     the smaller the curve radius the higher the higher the resistance to the  train    e Rolling Stock Rigid Wheelbase     the longer the rigid wheelbase of the vehicle  the  higher the resistance to the train  Modern bogie stock tends to have shorter rigid  wheelbase values and is not as bad as the older style 4 whee
113. e under the influence of centrifugal force  Centrifugal force is commonly defined as     e The apparent force that is felt by an object moving in a curved path that acts  outwardly away from the centre of rotation     e An outward force on a body rotating about an axis  assumed equal and opposite to  the centripetal force and postulated to account for the phenomena seen by an  observer in the rotating body     For this article the use of the phrase centrifugal force shall be understood to be an apparent force  as defined above     8 10 4 Effect of Centrifugal Force   When rolling stock rounds a curve  if the rails of the track are at the same elevation  i e  the two  tracks are at the same level  the combination of centrifugal force Fc and the weight of the rolling  stock W will produce a resulting force Fr that does not coincide with the centre line of track  thus  producing a downward force on the outside rail of the curve that is greater than the downward  force on the inside rail  Refer to Figure 1   The greater the velocity and the smaller the radius of  the curve  some railways have curve radius as low as 100m   the farther the resulting force Fr will  move away from the centre line of track  Equilibrium velocity was the velocity at which a train could  negotiate a curve with the rolling stock weight equally distributed across all the wheels     If the position of the resulting force Fr approaches the outside rail  then the rolling stock is at risk of     falling    off
114. ecting brakes and manipulating the brake hose connections can be  found here and here    7 6 4 Doors and Mirror Commands   Note that the standard keys in OR for these commands are different from those of MSTS     7 6 5 Wheelslip Reset  With the keys Ctrl X you get an immediate wheelslip reset     7 6 6 Toggle Advanced Adhesion  Advanced adhesion can be enabled or disabled by pressing Ctrl Alt X     7 6 7 Request to Clear Signal   When the player train has a red signal in front or behind it  it is sometimes necessary to ask for  authorization to pass the signal  This can be done by pressing Tab for a signal in front and  Shift Tab for a signal behind  You will receive a voice message reporting if you received  authorization or not  On the Track monitor window the signal colours will change from red to    Page 49 of 206    red white if permission is granted     7 6 8 Change Cab   Ctrl E   All locomotives and some passenger cars have a forward facing cab which is configured through  an entry in the ENG file  For example  the MSTS Dash9 file TRAINSET DASH9 dash9 eng  contains the entry     CabView   dash9 cvf      Where a vehicle has a cab at both ends  the ENG file may also contain an entry for a reversed  cab     CabView   dash9 _rv cvf      OR will recognise the suffix _rv as a rear facing cab and make it available as follows    When double heading  banking or driving multiple passenger units  DMUs and EMUs   your train  will contain more than one cab and OR allows you to move
115. elapsed before the  alarm is triggered or the penalty is  triggered    Time    MonitoringDeviceMonitorTimeLimit  5s         MonitoringDevice  AlarmTimeLimit  x      Period for which the alarm sounds  prior to the penalty being applied    Time    MonitoringDeviceAlarmTimeLimit  5s         MonitoringDevice  PenaltyTimeLimit  x      Period in seconds before the  penalty can be reset once  triggered    Time    MonitoringDevicePenaltyTimeLimit  60s         MonitoringDevice  CriticalLevel  x      Speed at which monitor triggers    Speed    MonitoringDeviceCriticalLevel  200kph         MonitoringDevice  ResetLevel  x      Speed at which monitor resets    Speed    MonitoringDeviceResetLevel  5kph         MonitoringDevice  AppliesFullBrake  x      Sets whether full braking will be  applied    Boolean   Oor1    MonitoringDeviceAppliesFullBrake  0         MonitoringDevice  AppliesEmergencyBrake  x      Sets whether emergency braking  will be applied    Boolean  0or 1    MonitoringDeviceAppliesEmergencyBrake  1         MonitoringDevice  AppliesCutsPower  x            Sets whether the power will be cut  to the locomotive       Boolean  0or 1       MonitoringDeviceAppliesCutsPower  1         Page 119 of 206                   MonitoringDevice Sets whether the engine will be Sisk             Boolean    0 or 1 MonitoringDeviceAppliesShutsDownEngine  0  AppliesShutsDownEngine  x   shut down g pp RELH  MonitoringDevice Set whether the monitor resets TPN       Boolean    0 or 1 MonitoringDeviceR
116. emains of the coupling train after coupling decoupling is only the locomotive     If the coupled train is an Al train  obviously it must be stopped on a waiting point when it has  to be coupled by the coupling train     10 13 2 2 Extended Al Function 5  Al train uncouples any number of its cars     To uncouple a predefined number of cars from an Al train  a special waiting point  WP  has to be  inserted     The format of this waiting point  in decimal notation  is usually 4NNSS  where NN is the number of  cars in front of the Al train that are NOT uncoupled  locomotive included  and SS is the duration of  the waiting point in seconds     The 5NNSS format is also accepted  In this case the remaining Al train is formed by NN cars   locomotives included  starting from the rear of the train  Of course there must be at least one  locomotive in this part of the train     It must be noted that the  front  of the Al train is the part which is at the front of the train in the  actual forward direction  So  if the consist has been created with the locomotive at first place  the  locomotive will be at the front up to the first reverse point  At that point   front  will become the last  car and so on     The following possibilities arise     e The Al train proceeds and stops with the locomotive at the front  and wants to  uncouple and proceed in the same direction  a WP with the above format is inserted  where the Al train will stop  counting cars starting from the locomotive     Page 13
117. en player  and non player trains  that are frequent in MSTS  have been practically eliminated     3 5 3 Focus on Realistic Content   The physics underlying adhesion  traction  engine components and their performance are based  on a world class simulation model that takes into account all of the major components of diesel   electric and steam engines  This includes elements like friction resistance in curves and tunnels  a  very sophisticated steam locomotive physics modeling  many optional curves to define precise  locomotive physics  coupler forces and much more  It is foreseen that beyond release 1 0 Open  Rails will approach the level of physics realism only available in professional simulators     Existing models that do not have the upgraded Open Rails capabilities continue  of course  to  perform well     In the package of this version also ancillary programs     tools     are delivered  including   e Track Viewer  a complete track viewer and path editor  e   Activity Editor  a draft new activity editor to move beyond MSTS    e Timetable Editor  a tool for preparing Timetables    Page 5 of 206    4 MSTS File Format Compatibility   Open Rails software supports the MSTS file formats detailed below  The software uses a file  parser to read the MSTS file information for use by the Open Rails software  Testing of the parser  software indicates that it will locate many errors or malformation in these files that are not  highlighted by the MSTS train sim software or by other u
118. en the  compressor is on  default  4      engine enginebrakereleaserate   Rate of engine brake pressure decrease in PSI per second   default 12 5      engine enginebrakeapplicationrate   Rate of engine brake pressure increase in PSI per second   default 12 5      engine brakepipechargingrate   Rate of lead engine brake pipe pressure increase in PSI per second   default 21      engine brakeservicetimefactor   Time in seconds for lead engine brake pipe pressure to drop to about 1 3  for service application  default 1 009      engine brakeemergencytimefactor   Time in seconds for lead engine brake pipe pressure to drop to  about 1 3 in emergency  default  1      Page 101 of 206    engine brakepipetimefactor   Time in seconds for a difference in pipe pressure between adjacent  cars to equalize to about 1 3  default  003      8 6 4 Brake Retainers   The retainers of a car will only be available if either the General Option    Retainer valve on all cars     is checked  or the car   s  wag file contains a retainer valve declaration  To declare a retainer the  line    BrakeEquipmentType   y    in the  wag file must include either the item    Retainer_4 Position     or the item    Retainer_3 Position     A 4 position retainer includes four states  exhaust  low pressure   10 psi   high pressure  20 psi   and slow direct  gradual drop to zero   A 3 position retainer does  not include the low pressure position  The use and display of the retainers is described in  Extended HUD for Brake 
119. er of the ENG file  Wagon   OR_adhesion   Curtius_Kniffler   ABCD       where A  B  C are coefficients of Curtius Kniffler  Kother or similar formula  By  default  Curtius Kniffler is used     f A  Fnmax   Weather _ coeff  M  981          C      B   Speed  kmph  j    This means that the maximum is related to the speed of the train  or to the weather conditions   The    D    parameter is used in an advanced adhesion model and should always be 0 7     There are some additional parameters in the    Force Information    HUD view  The axle wheel is  driven by the    Axle drive force    and braked by the    Axle brake force     The    Axle out force    is the  output force of the adhesion model  used to pull the train   To compute the model correctly the  FPS rate needs to be divided by a    Solver dividing    value in a range from 1 to 50  By default  the  Runge Kutta4 solver is used to obtain the best results  When the    Solver dividing    value is higher  than 40  in order to reduce CPU load the Euler modified solver is used instead     In some cases when the CPU load is high  the time step for the computation may become very  high and the simulation may start to oscillate  the    Wheel slip    rate of change  in the brackets   becomes very high   There is a stability correction feature that modifies the dynamics of the  adhesion characteristics  Higher instability can cause a huge wheel slip  You can use the     DebugResetWheelSlip        Ctrl X    keys by default  command to 
120. er ton  US  per degree of  curvature for standard gauge tracks  At very slow speeds  say 1 or 2 mph  the curve resistance is  closer to 1 0 Ib   or 0 05  up grade  per ton per degree of curve     Page 106 of 206    8 10 Super Elevation  Curve Speed Limit    Theory  8 10 1 Introduction  When a train rounds a curve  it tends to travel in a straight direction and the track must resist this  movement  and force the train to move around the curve  The opposing movement of the train and  the track result in a number of different forces being in play     8 10 2 19th  amp  20th Century Vs Modern Day Railway Design   In the early days of railway construction financial considerations were a big factor in route design  and selection  Given that the speed of competing transport  such as horses and water transport  was not very great  soeed was not seen as a major factor in the design process  However as  railway transportation became a more vital need for society  the need to increase the speed of  trains became more and more important  This led to many improvements in railway practices and  engineering  A number of factors  such as the design of the rolling stock  as well as the track  design  ultimately influence the maximum speed of a train  Today s high speed railway routes are  specifically designed for the speeds expected of the rolling stock     8 10 3 Centrifugal Force    Railway locomotives  wagons and carriages  hereafter referred to as rolling stock  when rounding  a curve com
121. erate faster according to the set value  Most of the  time  the train behaviour is controlled through the physics    But especially the  dec factor does have an important side effect  The deceleration value is  also used to calculate the expected required braking distance  Setting a higher deceleration  will reduce the required braking distance  allowing the train to continue to run at maximum  allowed speed for longer distances  This can have a significant effect on the timing    Take care  though  not to set the value too high   the calculated braking distance must of  course be sufficient to allow for proper braking  otherwise the train cannot stop in time  resulting in SPADs etc    A typical value for modern stock for the  dec command is 2 or 3      Dispose row    The  dispose row defines what happens to an Al train when it has reached the end of its run   i e  it has reached the end of the defined path    The information in the  dispose row can detail if the train is to be formed into another train   and  if so  how and where  For details see the commands as described further down    This row is optional and if included  the use per train is also optional    If the row is not included or the field is not set for a particular train  the train is removed from  the activity after it has terminated    The  dispose row presently does not affect the end of the run for the player train     Page 157 of 206    11 4 7 Control commands    11 4 7 1 General    Control commands can be
122. erelevation will be applied based upon the above classifications   Track gauge will default to the standard value of 4    8 5     1435mm    Unbalancedsuperelevation  Cant Deficiency  will be determined from the value entered by the  user  or will default to the following values     e Conventional Freight     0     Omm   e Conventional Passenger     3     75mm     e Engines  amp  tenders     6     150mm   Tilting trains require the addition of the relevant unbalancedsuperelevation information to the    relevant rolling stock files     Page 112 of 206    8 12 Tunnel Friction  Theory    8 12 1 Introduction  When a train travels through a tunnel it experiences increased resistance to the forward  movement     Over the years there has been much discussion about how to accurately calculate tunnel  resistance  The calculation methodology presented  and used in OR  is meant to provide an  indicative representation of the impacts that tunnel resistance will have on rolling stock  performance     8 12 2 Factors Impacting Tunnel Friction   In general  the train aerodynamics are related to aerodynamic drag  pressure variations inside the  train  train induced flows  cross wind effects  ground effects  pressure waves inside the tunnel   impulse waves at the exit of tunnel  noise and vibration  etc  The aerodynamic drag is dependent  on the cross sectional area of the train body  train length  the shape of train fore  and after bodies   the surface roughness of train body  and geographical
123. ers  You can also request  a private club so that only your friends know of your server  The forum is free to join and post     http   www tsimserver com forums    Page 171 of 206    12 6 Starting a Multi Player Session  12 6 1 Starting as Server                                                                                     Al     Open Rails 2646 _  camz  l Installation profile    2 2  l   Default   X   Add        Edit     Remove     Tools    e     Route  Route  Catania   Messina VE   Catania   Messina  gt   Linea costiera della Sicilia nord orientale   Mode  Lunghezza della linea 96km   Activi Timetable  a ay elettrificata nel 1954     Activity  Locomotive  Dash 9 v    Explore Route   Y    The GE 9 44CW  commonly called  the Dash 9    a modern diesel electric locomotive  most effective pulling loads  over long stretches at moderate speeds   Locomotive     Any Locomotive        Locomotive type  Diesel Electric  Consist  F  1 Dash   8 Cement A  Starting at   a X  Heading to   G  gt     Time  12 00 v Duration   Season  Summer    Difficulty     Weather    Clear Bd Singleplayer Multiplayer  Options   Start   User name  Client   6  o p en      Logging Host port  74 50 121  15 20460  rails ae Resume    7  Windowed Replay   Server Client                On the OR main menu you select in a standard way as described in the    Getting started    chapter  on the left side Route  activity or explore route  and in case of explore route you select as usual  locomotive  consist  path  t
124. es are driven by electric traction motors supplied by a diesel generator  set  The gen set is the only power source available  thus the diesel engine power also supplies  auxiliaries and other loads  Therefore  the output power will always be lower than the diesel  engine rated power     In ORTS  the diesel electric locomotive can use ORTSTractionCharacteristics or tables of  ORTSMaxTractiveForceCurves to provide a better approximation to real world performance  If a  table is not used  the tractive force is limited by MaxForce  MaxPower and MaxVelocity  The  throttle setting is passed to the ThrottteRPMTab  where the RPM demand is selected  The output  force increases with the Throttle setting  but the power follows maximal output power available   RPM dependent      8 2 3 Diesel Hydraulic Locomotives   Diesel hydraulic locomotives are not implemented in ORTS  However  by using either  ORTSTractionCharacteristics or ORTSMaxTractiveForceCurves tables  the desired performance  can be achieved  when no gearbox is in use and the DieselEngineType is    electric        8 2 4 Diesel Mechanical Locomotives   ORTS features a mechanical gearbox feature that mimics MSTS behavior  including automatic or  manual shifting  Some features not well described in MSTS are not yet implemented  such as  GearBoxBackLoadForce  GearBoxCoastingForce and GearBoxEngineBraking     Output performance is very different compared with MSTS  The output force is computed using  the diesel engine torque chara
125. es the amount of clouds  e fog increase decrease  e precipitation increase decrease   This demonstrates Open Rails software   s foundation for dynamic weather effects in the game     Moreover  pressing Alt P can change the weather from clear to raining to snowing and back to  clear     7 10 4 Seasons  In activity mode Open Rails software determines the season  and its related alternative textures to    display from the Season parameter in the MSTS Activity file  In other modes the player can select  the season in the start menu     7 11 Screenshot   Print Screen  Press the keyboard Print Screen key to capture an image of the game window  This will be saved  by default in the file C  Users  lt username gt  Pictures Open Rails Open Rails  lt date and time gt  png     Although the image is taken immediately  there may be a short pause before the confirmation  appears  If you hold down the Print Screen key  then OR takes multiple images as fast as it can     The key to capture the current window   Alt Print Screen   is not intercepted by OR     7 12 Suspending or Exiting the Game  You can suspend or exit the game by pressing the  ESC key at any time  The window shown at the  right will appear  roe   Pause Menu ij  Quit Open Rails  Alt   F4     The window is self explanatory   f   Save your game  F2   If you are running OR in a Window  you can also 7  Continue playing  Escape     exit OR by simply clicking on the x on the right top S ARNS J  of the OR window  Ree          1 Window
126. es whether the  wag file uses the FCalc utility or  other friction data  If FCalc was used to determine the Friction variables within the  wag file  Open  Rails compares that data to the Open Rails Davis equations to identify the closest match with the  Open Rails Davis equation  If no FCalc Friction parameters are used in the  wag file  Open Rails  ignores those values  substituting its actual Davis equation values for the train car     A basic  simplified  Davis formula is used in the following form     res _ force  ORTSDavis _ A   speedMpS   ORTSDavis _ B   ORTSDavis _ C  speedMpS     Where res_force is the friction force of the car  The rolling resistance can be defined either by  FCalc or ORTSDavis_A  _B and _C components  If one of the ORTSDavis components is zero   FCalc is used  Therefore  e g  if the data doesn   t contain the B part of the Davis formula  a very  small number should be used instead of zero     When a car is pulled from steady state  an additional force is needed due to higher bearing forces   The situation is simplified by using a different calculation at low speed  5 mph and lower    Empirical static friction forces are used for different classes of mass  under 10 tons  10 to 100 tons  and above 100 tons   In addition  if weather conditions are poor  snowing is set   the static friction  is increased     When running on a curve and if the    Curve dependent resistance    option is enabled  additional  resistance is calculated  based on the curve rad
127. es which are collectively  grouped together to form the    train resistance        The main resistive forces are as follows   i  Journal or Bearing resistance  or friction   ii  Air resistance    The above two values of resistance are modelled through the Davis formulas  and only apply on  straight level track     iii  Gradient resistance     trains travelling up hills will experience greater resistive forces then  those operating on level track     iv  Curve resistance     applies when the train is traveling around a curve  and will be impacted  by the curve radius  speed  and fixed wheel base of the rolling stock     v  Tunnel resistance   applies when a train is travelling through a tunnel   Tractive Effort    Tractive Effort is created by the action of the steam against the pistons  which  through the media  of rods  crossheads  etc   cause the wheels to revolve and the engine to advance     Tractive Effort is a function of mean effective pressure of the steam cylinder and is expressed by  following formula for a simple locomotive  Geared and compound locomotives will have slightly  different formula     TE   Cyl 2 x  M E P  x d2 x s  D    Where   Cyl   number of cylinders  TE   Tractive Effort  lbf   M E P    mean effective pressure of cylinder  psi   D   diameter of cylinder  in   S   stroke of cylinder piston  in     D   diameter of drive wheels  in     Page 81 of 206    Theoretical Tractive Effort    To allow the comparison of different locomotives  as well as determi
128. esetOnZeroSpeed  1   ResetOnZeroSpeed  x   when the speed is null 8 peed  1    MonitoringDevice Sets whether the monitor resets ar      j Boolean    0 or 1 MonitoringDeviceResetOnResetButton  0  ResetOnResetButton  x   when the reset button is pushed g tuy             Specific parameters of the Overspeed Monitor                   MonitoringDeviceAlarmTime Period for which the alarm sounds Time MunitoringbevivedlanummenetareQverspeelt 2s   BeforeOverSpeed  x   prior to the penalty being applied  MonitoringDeviceTrigger eee        M D T OnTrackO dM 5kph  OnTrackOverspeedMargin  x  Allowed overspeed Speed onitoringDeviceTriggerOnTrackOverspeedMargin  5kph    ed ee Maximum allowed speed Speed MonitoringDeviceTriggerOnTrackOverspeed  200kph               Page 120 of 206       9 Further Open Rails Rolling Stock Features    9 1 Train Engine Lights  OR supports the whole set of lights accepted by MSTS     9 2 Tilting trains  OR supports tilting trains  A train tilts when its  con file name contains the    tilted    string  e g   ETR460_tilted con        Page 121 of 206    10 Open Rails Train Operation  Note that this document details behaviour while in single player mode only  For multi player mode   different rules may apply     10 1 Open Rails Activities  OR has the aim of running in a compatible way most of the activities written for MSTS     Also  activities specifically for OR can be created  using the additional functions OR features  like  Extended Al Shunting  Discussions of 
129. et to be developed further     To distinguish between these items  the following styles are used in the description of timetable  mode     Items shown in black italics are available but only in a provisional implementation  or in a limited  context  Further development of these items is still required     Important aspects where the use of specific OR or MSTS items for timetables differs  significantly from its use in an activity are shown in bold     Apart from the items indicated as above  it should be realised that as work continues  all items are  still subject to change     11 2 General  11 2 1 Data definition  The timetable data is defined in a Spreadsheet  and saved as a   csv file  character separated file   in Unicode format  As the separation character  either      comma  or      semi colon  must be used   Do not select space or tab as the separation character     As     or     are possible separation character  these symbols must not be used anywhere within the  actual data  Enclosure of text by quotes  either single or double  has no effect  Also  the character       should not be used in train names  since it is the prefix for reserved words in the Timetable     11 2 2 File structure  The saved   csv files must be renamed with extension   timetable_or  The timetable files must be  placed in a subdirectory named    OpenRails    created in the route s Activities directory     Page 151 of 206    11 2 3 File and train selection  When starting a timetable run  the mod
130. eturn to a correct  situation  e g  get back to in front of the signal at danger  authorised path etc    Once a normal  situation has been restored  the player can switch back to Auto Mode  If the action led the player  train onto a section of track already cleared for another train  that train is also stopped    10 3 4 Explorer Mode   When OR is started in Explorer Mode instead of in an activity  the train is set to Explorer Mode     The player has full control over all switches  Signals will clear as normal but signals can be cleared  over routes which are not normally available using the Tab or Shift Tab commands     Page 126 of 206    10 4 Track Access Rules  All trains clear their own path  When in Auto Signal mode  part of that function is transferred to the  signals     In Auto Node mode  trains will clear their path up to 5 000 metres  or the distance covered in 2  mins  at the maximum allowed speed  whichever is greater  In Auto Signal mode  the number of  signals cleared ahead of the train is taken from the value of the SignalNumClearAhead parameter  as defined in the sigcfg dat file for the first signal ahead of the train     In Manual mode  the distance cleared is 3 000 metres maximum  or as limited by signals   Distances in Explorer Mode are similar to those in Auto Mode     If a train is stopped at a signal it can claim the track ahead ensuring it will get priority as the next  train onto that section  but to avoid needless blocking of other possible routes  no 
131. eturn to auto mode while  the train is moving  Details are described in the paragraph of the link shown above     Page 40 of 206    Track Monitor display in Auto Signal mode             Speed Aira   lt j Actual speed  Projected 60 9 mph C Predicted speed    Limit A ail   Control mode             PACE LE            Max  allowed speed    Dist Speed Aspect  Eye indicating Cab direction           s    q    Advance signal area    EA       Fixed distance indicators     gt       A       Signal aspect  Speed limit       Distance of first object    Own train symbol      ws Backward state line    Arrow indicating reverser direction  Backward information area       p        Track Monitor display in Manual mode   Explorer mode     Track Monitor    Speed yan   i        Actual speed  Projected Aus                 Predicted speed    Limit 71 mphit  pe WED    Dist Speed Aspect    Max  allowed speed       Control mode      lt    q    Advance signal area    Eye indicating Cab direction       Fixed distance indicators  gt    1 01mi Forward information area    Distance of first object    __ a  H    Arrow indicating reverser direction Own train symbol    Train ahead indication    Backward information area    Advance signal area       j       Page 41 of 206    Track Monitor  Displayed Symbols  common for Auto and Manual mode unless indicated    otherwise       We End of authority other than signal    i Train ahead        Reversal point  Auto mode only        l Station symbol  Auto mode only     No
132. ext switch or signal or the end of track     The    diverging    point is determined   this is the switch node where the reverse route diverges from  the incoming route  From this point  a search is made for the last signal facing the reverse  direction which is located such that the full train will fit in between the signal and the end of the  path  If there is such a signal  this will become the    diverging    point  In order for a train to be able to  reverse  the rear of the train must be clear of this    diverging    point     Reversal for Al trains occurs as in MSTS  that is  when the Al train   s first car reaches the reversal  point  If at that point the rear of the train has not yet cleared the diverging point  the reversal takes  place later  when the diverging point is cleared     For player trains the reversal can take place starting from 50 meters before the reversal point  provided the diverging point is cleared     As in MSTS  double reversal points can be used to set a signal at red after such reversal points   However waiting points are recommended for this  as explained in the next paragraph     10 7 Waiting Points  10 7 1 General  Waiting points  WP  set in a path used by an Al train are regularly respected by the train  and  executed when the head of the train reaches the WP     Differently from MSTS  waiting points do not influence the length of the reserved path  except  when the WP is followed by a signal in the same track section  no nodes     that is
133. f they fail to restore  Undelete  7  Pause replay at end  1 of 3 saves for this route are no longer valid     Pause seconds before end  30 3    Import       Delete all invalid saves in Open Rails   export Replay from previous save     Replay from start                                       7 13 1 Saves from Previous OR Versions    You should be aware that these Saves will only be useful in the short term as each new version of  Open Rails will mark Saves from previous versions as potentially invalid  e g  the second entry in  the list below      Q Saved Games   Settle  amp  Carlisle Line   Short Passenger Run      Time Tile  24 04 2014 20 04 00 00 04 0 0  6112 7  15057 6  24 04 2014 19 49 00 00 04 0 0  6112 7 150576  I   24 04 2014 19 27 00 00 06 0 0  6112 7  15057 6        Distance                             Page 56 of 206    When you resume from such a Save  there will be a warning prompt           Open Rails    This save was made by an older version of Open Rails and  may be incompatible with the current version X 2002   Please do not report any problems that may result        Continue at your own risk        The Save will be tested during the loading process  If a problem is detected  then you will be  notified     Veo Save file is incompatible with current revision of Open Rails so activity  NG  cannot continue     Save file   C  Users Chris AppData Roaming Open Rails shrtpass  2014 04 24 19 49 42 save    Save file revision   0  Open Rails revision   2002       This Sav
134. file     The function  TRAINHASCALLON    will return    true    if the section beyond the signal up to the next  signal includes a platform where the train is booked to stop  and the train has the  callon  flag set   This function will also return  true  if there is no platform in the section beyond the signal     The function  TRAINHASCALLON_RESTRICTED  returns    true    in similar conditions  except that it  always returns    false    if there is no platform in the section beyond the signal     Both functions must be used in combination with BLOCK_STATE   BLOCK_OCCUPIED     11 5 6 3 Wait Commands and Passing Paths    From the location where the  wait  or    follow    is defined  a search is made for the first common  section for both trains  following on from a section where the paths are not common     However  on single track routes with passing loops where    passing paths    are defined for both  trains  the main path of the trains will run over the same tracks in the passing loops and therefore  no not common sections will be found  As a result  the waiting point cannot find a location for the  train to wait and therefore the procedure will not work     If waiting points are used on single track lines  the trains must have their paths running over  different tracks through the passing loop in order for the waiting points to work properly     It is a matter of choice by the timetable creator to either pre set passing locations using the wait    Page 168 of 206    comma
135. for Al trains which can depend on other trains  e g  wait a limited time      21 3 Open Rails Route Editor  Now that the project is moving beyond MSTS  we are at last able to specify the Open Rails Route  Editor  This will free us from the constraints and fragility of the MSTS tool  The editor will  of  course  use GIS data  edit the terrain and allow objects to be placed and moved   In particular  it will be possible to lay both track pieces and procedural track  The procedural track  may bend up and down to follow the contours of the land and twist to build banked curves and  spirals  There will be support for transition curves and it will be easy to lay a new track parallel to  an existing one   The new Route Editor will not be backwards compatible with MSTS routes  It will work with Open  Rails routes and there will be a utility to create an Open Rails route from an MSTS route     No timetable is available for this work     Page 202 of 206    22 Acknowledgements  Open Rails is the result of true teamwork performed by a group of passionate people  We owe a  massive thanks to all of them and therefore wish to mention them below and excuse ourselves if  someone has been forgotten     Adam Kane  Adam Miles  Alex Bloom  Andre Ming     Anthony Brailsford  Barrie Scott  Barry Munro   Bill Currey   Bill Prieger   Bob Boudoin  Bruno Sanches  Carlo Santucci  Chris Jakeman   Chris Van Wagoner  Craig Benner  Daniel Leach  David B  Clarke  Dennis Towlson  Derek Morton  Doug Kightley  
136. for trains heading in the same direction as the definition of the  path     Page 161 of 206    The path defined in the waitany command must have a common section with the path of the  train itself  otherwise no waiting position can be found     This command can be set to control trains to wait beyond the normal signal or deadlock rules   For instance  it can be used to perform a check for a train which is to leave a siding or yard   checking the line the train is to join for any trains approaching on that line  for a distance  further back than signalling would normally clear  so as to ensure it does not get into the path  of any train approaching on that line     With the  both qualifier set  it can be used at the terminating end of single track lines to  ensure a train does not enter that section beyond the last passing loop if there is another train  already in that section as this could lead to irrecoverable deadlocks       no waitsignal  Syntax    waitsignal     nowaitsignal    Normally  if a train is stopped at a station and the next signal ahead is still at danger  the train  will not depart  But  there are situations where this should be overruled     Some stations are    free line    stations   that is  they are not controlled by signals  usually small  halts  without any switches     The next signal probably is a    normal    block signal and may be some distance from the  station  In that situation  the train does not have to wait for that signal to clear in order 
137. function of control setting and speed can be defined in a  DynamicBrakeForceCurves table that works like the MaxTractiveForceCurves table  see here   If  there is no DynamicBrakeForceCurves defined in the ENG file  than one is created based on the  MSTS parameter values     8 6 3 Native Open Rails Braking Parameters  Open Rails has implemented additional specific braking parameters to deliver realism in braking  performance in the simulation     Following are a list of specific OR parameters and their default values  The default values are used  in place of MSTS braking parameters  however  two MSTS parameters are used for the release  state  MaxAuxilaryChargingRate and EmergencyResChargingRate     wagon brakepipevolume   Volume of car s brake pipe in cubic feet  default  5      This is dependent on the train length calculated from the ENG to the last car in the train  This  aggregate factor is used to approximate the effects of train length on other factors       Strictly speaking this value should depend on the car length  but the Open Rails Development  team doesn   t believe it is worth the extra complication or CPU time that would be needed to  calculate it in real time  We will let the community customize this effect by adjusting the brake  servicetimefactor instead  but the Open Rails Development team doesn   t believe this is worth the  effort by the user for the added realism     engine mainreschargingrate   Rate of main reservoir pressure change in PSI per second wh
138. g introduced in Open Rails may be turned on and off through the     Experimental    tab of the Options window  as described below     x    General   Audio   Video   Simulation   Keyboard   Data logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater Experimental      Experimental features that may slow down the game  use at your own risk     Super clevation IV Load night textures only when needed  Jo 4A a I Signal light glow   50   Minimum length  m  JV Extended AI train shunting   1435   Gauge  mm  I7 Autopilot    Automatically tune settings to keep performancelevel   ETCS circular speed gauge  60   i Target frame rate I Extend object maximum viewing distance to horizon  I    Double overhead wires V Load DDS textures in preference to ACE  I Show shape warnings IV Location linked passing path processing  IV Forced red at station stops      MSTS environments  Level of detail bias  Default detail   0   Adhesion factor correction  100        c  J Adhesion proportional to rain snow fog  Adhesion factor random change  10        6 10 1 Super elevation   If the value set for    Level    is greater than zero  OR supports super elevation for long curved tracks   The value    Minimum Length    determines the length of the shortest curve to have super elevation   You need to choose the correct gauge for your route  otherwise some tracks may not be properly  shown     When super elevation is selected  two viewing effects occur at runtime     1  If an external camera view is selected  the tracks and the 
139. ggested that you add them just prior to the last  parenthesis     8 13 2 OR Defaults    Open Rails uses the following standard defaults  unless overridden by values included in the TRK  file     i  Tunnel Perimeter     Speed track 2track     lt 160km h 21 3 31m  160  lt  200km h 25 0m 34 5m  200  lt  250km h 28 0m 35 0m  250  lt  350km h 32 0m 37 5m    ii  Tunnel Cross Sectional Area      __ Speed    _   _itrack    2track     lt 120km h 27 0m 45 0m    lt 160km h 42 0m2 76 0m2  200km h 50 0m2 80 0m2  250km h 58 0m2 90 0m2  350km h 70 0m2 100 0m2    Page 115 of 206    8 14 OR Specific File Inclusions for MSTS  eng and  wag Files  In the preceding paragraphs many references have been made to OR specific parameters and  tables to be included in  eng and  wag files  MSTS is in general quite tolerant if it finds unknown  parameters and even blocks within  eng and  wag files  and continues running normally  However  this way of operating is not encouraged by the OR team  Instead  a cleaner approach  as  described here  has been implemented     Within the trainset folder containing the  eng and  wag files to be upgraded  create a subfolder  named    OpenRails     Within this subfolder a text file named xxxx eng or xxxx wag  where xxxx eng  Or Xxxx wag is the name of the original file  must be created     For the contents of this new file there are two possibilities  either     the file contains all of the information included in the original file  except for modified parts of  course
140. gnal to signal  Only in specifically defined situations can routes be cleared short of a signal as  detailed below     Auto Node is set when the train has not encountered any signals yet  e g  on unsignalled routes or  at the start of the route when there is no signal along the path of the train as far as it can be  cleared   e g  in yards where the train starts but has no clear route yet to the first signal     Auto Node can also be set if the route ahead cannot be fully cleared up to the next signal  and  partial clearing is allowed     A number of sub states are defined in Auto Node  depending on the reason that clearance is    Page 123 of 206    terminated  In the list below   A  indicates a subtype which can occur if no signal has yet been  encountered   B  indicates a subtype when a route from a signal is partially cleared     The following states are possible      e  A  route ahead is clear to the maximum distance for which the track is cleared  The  control mode is set to Auto Node   Max Distance     e  A  route ahead is blocked at a switch which is aligned for and occupied or reserved  by another train  Control mode is set to Auto Node   Misaligned Switch     e  A  B   only if signal allows access to occupied track  or after Tab command  route  ahead is occupied by a stationary train or train moving in the same direction  Control  mode is set to Auto Node   Train Ahead     e Note that  for  A   it should not be possible that the route ahead is occupied by a train  mo
141. gnals  only become valid  when the rear of the train has cleared the position of soeedpost or signal     When a speed limit set by a signal is lower than the speed limit set by the last speedpost  the  speed limit is set to the lower value  However  when a speed limit as set by a signal is higher than  the present speed limit set by the last speedpost  the limit defined by the speedpost will be  maintained  If a lower speed limit was in force due to a limit set by another signal  the allowed limit  is set to that as defined by the speedpost     If a soeedpost sets a limit which is higher than that set by the last signal  the limit set by the signal  is overruled and the allowed limit is set to that as defined by the speedpost  Instead  the valid  speed limit is always the lower of that of the last signal and that of the last speedpost     Page 129 of 206    10 10 Further Features of Al Train Control    Al trains always run in Auto control mode     Al trains will ignore any manual setting of switches and will reset all switches as  defined in their path     Al trains will stop at stations and will adhere to the booked station departure times if  possible     Al trains will stop at a platform such that the middle of the train is in the middle of the  platform  If the train is longer than the platform  it means that both the front and rear of  the train will extend outside the platform  If the platform has a signal at the end  and  this signal is held at danger  see above   and 
142. gs  Of course  it is up to the developers to decide if  something is a real bug  but in any case your reporting of it is an important step in helping the  development team to improve Open Rails     19 2 Overview of Bug Types  The development team uses two ways of keeping track of bugs     1  So called  Maybe Bugs  are reported in a simple forum post  see next paragraph for links  This  is done in order to give developers a chance to filter out problems caused by circumstances the  development team cannot control such as corrupted content     2  Decided Bugs are issues a developer has looked at and has found to be a real issue in the  program code of Open Rails  They are reported at our Bug Tracker at  https   ougs Launchpad net or   registration is required      19 3    Maybe Bugs     If you find an issue with Open Rails you should first file a Maybe Bug report at any of the following  forums monitored by the Open Rails development team     e Elvas Tower  http   www elvastower com     Maybe it   s a bug  section of the Open  Rails sub forum  This is the forum that is most frequently checked by the OR  development team     e  TrainSim com  http   www trainsim com     Open Rails discussion  section of the Open  Rails sub forum    e MJRMSTSRepaints  http   mirmstsrepaints proboards com       more forums may be added in the future    A Maybe Bug report consists of a simple post in a new topic in the forum  The title of the topic  should be of the form  Open Rails V     Bug       
143. h  SLPT  slipped to end of track  OOTR  out of track  MASW  misaligned switch   Distance  distance to the authority location   Signal  aspect of next signal  if any      Distance  distance to this signal   Note that if signal state is STOP  and it is the next authority limit  there is a    Page 64 of 206    difference of about 30m between authority and signal distance  This is the  safety  margin    that Al trains keep to avoid accidentally passing a signal at danger     Consist  the first part of the train s service name  Only for the player  always the     PLAYER    string is displayed     Path  the state of the train s path   The figure left of the     sign is the train s present subpath counter   a train s path is  split into subpaths when its path contains reversal points   The details between   and   are the actual subpath   Following the final   can be x lt N gt   this indicates that at the end of this subpath the  train will move on to the subpath number N     Path details      The path shows all track circuit sections which build this train s path  Track circuit  sections are bounded by nodes  signals or cross overs  or end of track   Each section is indicated by its type        is plain train section    gt  is switch  no distinction is made for facing or trailing switch      is crossover       is end of track     Following each section is the section state  Numbers in this state refer to the train numbers  as shown at the start of each row  Below   lt n gt  indicate
144. h can be customized  or is estimated by  the engine parameters     8 2 1 1 Starting the Diesel Engine    To start the engine  simply press the START STOP key once  The direction controller must be in  the neutral position  otherwise  a warning message pops up   The engine RPM  revolutions per  minute  will increase according to its speed curve parameters  described later   When the RPM  reaches 90  of StartingRPM  67  of IdleRPM by default   the fuel starts to flow and the exhaust  emission starts as well  RPM continues to increase up to StartingConfirmationRPM  110  of  IdleRPM by default  and the demanded RPM is set to idle  The engine is now started and ready to  operate     8 2 1 2 Stopping the Diesel Engine    To stop the engine  press the START STOP key once  The direction controller must be in the  neutral position  otherwise  a warning message pops up   The fuel flow is cut off and the RPM will  start to decrease according to its speed curve parameters  The engine is considered as fully  stopped when RPM is zero  The engine can be restarted even while it is stopping  RPM is not  zero      8 2 1 3 Starting or Stopping    helper    Diesel Engines    By pressing the Diesel helper START   STOP key  Shift   Y on English keyboards   the diesel  engines of helper locomotives can be started or stopped  Also consider disconnecting the unit  from the multiple unit  MU  signals instead of stopping the engine  see here     Toggle MU  connection         It is also possible to oper
145. h the  mouse on the desired heading        Key Commands     displays the actions of the keyboard keys       Key Commands    CO e e  EOE     Escape   F2   Alt   F4   Pause   PrintScreen   Alt   INVIO   G   Shift  G   At G   Control   G   Alt   U   Control   E   Alt  E  Game Multi Player Dispatcher Control   9  Game Multi Player Texting Control   T  Game Switch Manual Mode Control   M          Briefing     displays what the activity creator has entered as information to be provided to the  player about the activity        le       Briefing    Building and Sorting Outbound Cuts  Difficulty  Medium  Estimated time to complete  20 minutes    June 10th  15 00    You need to assemble a cut of cars for westbound pickup  There are two cuts in the yard     on  Whitefish Siding 3 and 5     and a single empty logger  on Whitefish Siding 1  You need to pull the  appropriate westbound cars out of the two cuts  get the logger  and assemble them all into a single  westbound ready cut on Whitefish Siding 8     To learn more about completing Activities  see Help  press F1      Page 39 of 206       Timetable     shows the list of the station stops  if any  with scheduled and actual times of  arrival and departure  During the activity the actual performance will be shown on the F10    Activity Monitor        Work Orders     if defined by the activity creator  lists the coupling and uncoupling operations  to be performed  When an operation has been completed  the string    Done    appears in the 
146. halting of the activity  by the location event and suppresses the display of the event message  Also  if the value of 0  is inserted in the line as in the example above  the display of the event message is  completely suppressed  Only one sound file per event is allowed     Page 150 of 206    11 Timetable Mode    11 1 Introduction  The timetable concept is not a replacement for the activity definition  but is an alternative way of  defining both player and computer controlled  Al and Static  trains     In an activity  the player train is defined explicitly  and all Al trains are defined in a traffic definition   Static trains are defined separately     In a timetable all trains are defined in a similar way  On starting a timetable run  the required  player train is selected from the list of available trains  In the timetable definition itself  no  distinction is made between running trains     any of the running trains can be selected as player  train  and if not selected as such they will be run as Al trains  Static trains are also defined in the  same way but cannot be selected as the player train     As a result  the number of different    activities    that can be played using the same timetable file is  equal to the number of trains which are defined in the timetable     The development of the timetable concept is still very much a work in progress  This document  details the state as it is at the moment  but also includes items yet to be produced  or items which  have y
147. he departing train    This qualifier is optional and takes no values      triggers  Syntax    triggers  lt train gt      triggers also defines which new train is to be formed out of this train when the train  terminates     However  when this command is used  the new train will be formed using the consist  definition of the new train and the existing consist is removed     Command value   referenced train  this is compulsory    static  Syntax     static  The train will become a  static  train after it has terminated   Command value   none    stable    Syntax    stable  out_path  lt path gt   out_time time  in_path  lt path gt   in_time time  static   runround  lt path gt   rrtime  time  rrpos  lt runround position gt   forms  lt train gt   triggers  lt train gt      stable is an extended form of either  forms   triggers or  static  where the train is moved to  another location before the related command is performed  In case of  forms or  triggers  the  train can move back to the same or to another location where the new train actually starts   Note that in these cases  the train has to make two moves  outward and inward     A runround can be performed in case  forms is defined     If  triggers is defined  the change of consist will take place at the    stable    position  Any  reversal s  in the inward path  or at the final inward position  are taken into account when the  new train is build  such that the consist is facing the correct direction when the new train is  formed
148. he last car  AlttHome resets the target to the  front  Alt End to the rear of the train     The camera   s position with respect to the target car is manipulated by the four arrow keys      left or right arrows rotate the camera   s position left or right  up or down arrows rotate the  camera   s position up or down while remaining at a constant distance from the target  The  distance from the camera to the target is changed by zooming with the PageUp and  PageDown keys  Rotation of the camera view direction about the camera   s position is  controlled by holding down the Alt key while using the arrow buttons  or by moving the mouse  with the right mouse button depressed  The scroll wheel on the mouse zooms the screen  image  the field of view is shown briefly  Ctrl 8 resets the view angles to their default position  relative to the current target car     e Key 4 is a trackside view from a fixed camera position with limited player control   the  height of the camera can be adjusted with the up and down arrow keys  Repeated  pressing of the 4 key may change the position along the track     e Key 5 is an interior view that is active if the active train has a    passenger view     declaration in any of its cars  or in the caboose   The view direction can be rotated by  the arrow keys or the mouse with right button pressed  The camera position is moved  forward or backward along the train axis with the PageUp and PageDown keys  and  moved left or right or up or down with Alt   th
149. he time as defined in  start is normally used as the start time of the timetable     activity      If a train is formed out of another train and this train is included in the timetable  then if this  train is delayed and has not arrived before the defined start time  the starting of this train is  also delayed until the train out of which it is formed has arrived  This applies to both Al and  player train  This means that the start of the player activity can be delayed     For details on starting and running of trains around midnight see the paragraph below     The  start field can also contain the following command    create   lt time gt     ahead  lt train gt      The  create command will create that train at the time as indicated  If no time is set  the train  will be created before the start of the first train  The train will be    static    until the time as set as  start time    The normal rules for train placement still apply  so a train cannot be placed onto a section of  track already occupied by another train     However  storage sidings often hold multiple trains  To allow for this  and to ensure the trains  are stored in proper order  first one out up front   the parameter   ahead  lt train gt   must be  used    The train will now be placed ahead of the referenced train  in the direction of the train s path   Multiple trains can be stored on a single siding  but care must be taken to set the proper  references  The reference must always be to the previous train   
150. hich is common to both trains  starting at the  location where the  wait is defined  or at the start of the path if defined in the  note row    If the start location is already common for both trains  then first a search is done for the first  section which is not common to both trains  and the wait is applied to the next first common  section beyond that     If the wait is set  the section will not be cleared for this train until the referenced train has  passed this section  This will force the train to wait  The referenced train must exist for the  wait to be valid     However  if  notstarted is set  the wait will also be set even if the referenced train has not yet  been started  This can be used where the wait position is very close to the start position of  the referenced train  and there is a risk that the train may clear the section before the  referenced train is started     Care should be taken when defining a  wait at a location where the train is to reverse  As the  search is performed for the active subpath only  a  wait defined at a location where the train  is to reverse will not be effective as the common section will be in the next subpath after the  reversal  In such a situation  the train should be    split    into two separate definitions  one up to  the reversal location and another starting at that location     Command value   referenced train  this is compulsory   Command qualifiers       maxdelay n   n is the maximum delay  in minutes  of the reference
151. icking on a field and pressing the new desired key  Three symbols will  appear at the right of the field  with the first one you validate the change  with the second one you  cancel it  with the third one you return to the default value     By clicking on    Check    OR verifies that the changes made are compatible  that is  that there is no  key that is used for more than one command     By clicking on    Defaults    all changes that were made are reset  and the default values are  reloaded     By clicking on    Export    a printable text file    Open Rails Keyboard txt    is generated on the desktop   showing all links between commands and keys     Page 24 of 206    6 6 Data Logger Options     General   Audio   Video   Simulation   Keyboard Data logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater   Experimental      Use dataloggerto record your simulation data  in game command  F12    Please remember that the size of the dump file grows with the simulation time      comma    Separator   route M Speed units    J Start logging with the simulation start     x    IV Log performance data    J Log physics data    I  Log miscellaneous data       By selecting the option    Start logging with the simulation start    or by pressing F12 a file with the  name dump csv is generated in the configured Open Rails logging folder  placed on the Desktop  by default   This file can be used for later analysis     Page 25 of 206    6 7 Evaluation Options    options i x       General   Audio   Video   Simula
152. if there is no signal in the same  section  if instead there is a signal  it will stay red until the WP has expired or until the train will  stop in front of the WP  the later of the two events will be considered      Absolute waiting points are a comfortable way of synchronizing and scheduling train operation     10 8 Signals at Station Stops  If the signal at the end of a platform protects a route which contains switches  that signal will be  held at danger up to 2 minutes before the booked departure  If the station stop is less than 2  minutes  the signal will clear as the train comes to a stand  This applies to both Al train and player  trains     However  if the platform length is less than half the train length  the signal will not be held but will  clear as normal to allow the train to properly position itself along the platform  Signals which only  protect plain track will also not be held     In some railway control systems trains do not get a red at the station starting signal when they  have to stop in that station     To achieve this  you can select the Experimental Option    Forced red at station stops    to disable  this signal behavior     Signals at waiting points for player trains will be held at danger until the train has stopped and the  waiting point has expired  For signals at waiting points for Al trains  see the preceding paragraph     10 9 Speedposts and Speed Limits Set by Signals  Speed limits which raise the allowed speed  as set by speedposts or si
153. ime  season and weather     On the lower right side you enter your User Name and the host and port address  If you want to  run as standalone server  or if you want to have more than instance of OR running in MP mode on  the same computer  you must set Host port to 127 0 0 1 30000  30000 is the default port  but you  can change to any integer between 10000 and 65536     If you want to run in a local area network usually valid host addresses are 192 168 1 2 or  192 168 1 1     After having inserted the Username and Host port data you click on    Server       When server starts  Windows Firewall may ask if you want to allow OR access to the Internet  If  so  Click Allow  If you use other firewall software  you may need to configure it to allow OpenRails  to access the Internet     There is no built in limit of how many players can connect  a server with good Internet upload  bandwidth can be expected to handle at least 10 client connections     Page 172 of 206    12 6 2 Starting as Client  On the left side of the main menu you must enter only route  path and consist  The other  parameters are received from the server     On the right side you enter your username  IP address and port of the server  and click on    Client       12 7 In Game Controls  Once the server and clients have started and connected  to display MultiPlayer status you must  press F5 to display the basic HUD  at the bottom of it you will see the information  You can watch  how many players and trains are prese
154. in is driven by an electric  locomotive  as the first operation you have to raise the pantograph  key P   To look around in the  simulation  you can select different views using the keyboard  as described in    Changing the View     below     7 3 Open Rails Driving Controls  Open Rails follows MSTS very closely  providing controls to drive steam  electric and diesel  locomotives  both on their own or working together  but also offers additional capabilities     A very wide range of systems and instruments specified in the ENG and CVF files is supported     To control the train  you have at your disposal a set of keyboard commands that is equivalent to  those of MSTS  plus some new ones  You can get a printable version of the command set as  described in paragraph 6 5  Keyboard options   or you can press F1 to immediately get the  scrollable F1 Information Window as shown and described below     Alternatively  you can operate the cabview controls by mouse click  buttons  and mouse drag   levers and rotary switches      7 3 1 Throttle Control   Steam locomotives have a continuous throttle or regulator  but many diesel and electric  locomotives have a notched throttle which moves only in steps  To avoid jerks  some of these  steps may be  smooth   where the power is gradually and automatically adjusted to achieve the  setting     7 3 2 Dynamic Braking   Dynamic braking is the use of the traction motors of a locomotive  electric or diesel electric  as  generators to slow the trai
155. ine      e TrainHasCallOn      e Activity or Timetable   call on always allowed  e TrainsHasCallOn_Restricted      e Activity or Timetable   call on never allowed    10 15 6 How to Lay Down These Signals on the Route   These signals can be laid down with the MSTS RE  In the  tdb file only a reference to the  SignalType name is written  an in the world file only a reference to the signal head is written  As  these are accordingly to MSTS standards  no need to manually edit route files exists     10 15 7 Signalling Function NEXT_NSIG_LR  This function is similar to NEXT_SIG_LR  except that it returns the state of the nth signal ahead     Function call   state   NEXT_NSIG_LR MstsSignalFunction fn_type  int n    Returned value   state of nth signal ahead  except     e When there are less than n signals ahead of the train    e when any of the intermediate signals is at danger   In those situations  the function will return SIGASP_STOP     Page 147 of 206    Usage   take  for instance  the sequence of signals as shown below        HED HI   HD HID     B C D   The distance between signals B and C  as well as between C and D  is shorter than the required  braking distance  Therefore  if D is at danger  both C and B must show yellow  similar  if C is at  danger  both B and A must be yellow    Problem now is what aspect should be shown at A   if B is yellow  is it because C is at red  so A  must also be yellow  or is it because C is at yellow as D is at red   in which case A can show  g
156. ined by the retainer setting     The following brake types are implemented in OR   e Vacuum single  e Air single pipe  e Air twin pipe  e EP  Electro pneumatic     e Single transfer pipe  air and vacuum     The operation of air single pipe brakes is described in general below     Page 97 of 206    The auxiliary reservoir needs to be charged by the brake pipe and  depending on the WAG file  parameters setting  this can delay the brake release  When the Graduated Release Air Brakes  box is not checked  the auxiliary reservoir is also charged by the emergency reservoir  until both  are equal and then both are charged from the pipe   When the Graduated Release Air Brakes  box is checked  the auxiliary reservoir is only charged from the brake pipe  The Open Rails  software implements it this way because the emergency reservoir is used as the source of the  reference pressure for regulating the brake cylinder pressure     The end result is that you will get a slower release when the Graduated Release Air Brakes box  is checked  This should not be an issue with two pipe air brake systems because the second pipe  can be the source of air for charging the auxiliary reservoirs     Open Rails software has modeled most of this graduated release car brake behavior based on the  26F control valve  but this valve is designed for use on locomotives  The valve uses a control  reservoir to maintain the reference pressure and Open Rails software simply replaced the control  reservoir with the e
157. ins reversal points  the train must be in between the  same reversal points as it was when it switched to Manual Mode  i e  same subpath      If the train is moving in the direction as the path defines  switching back to Auto Mode can be done  while the train is moving  The rear of the train need not be on the defined path  only the front     If the train is moving in the opposite direction  it must be at a standstill in order to switch back to  Auto Mode  If the orientation of the train   s route was somehow reversed  e g  by moving through a  balloon line or a Y section  and differs from the direction in the defined path  both the front and  rear must be on the defined path  In this situation  the orientation will switch back to the direction  as defined in the path     10 3 3 Out of Control Mode  This is a special mode  Normally  the player train should not be in this mode     The out of control mode is activated when the player violates a security rule   Such incidents are     e when the player train passes a signal at danger  SPAD     e when the player train passes over a misaligned switch    e when the player train runs beyond the end of the authorised path   These actions will place the player train into out of control mode     In this situation  the emergency brake is activated and maintained until the train is stopped  The  player has no control over his train until it is at a standstill     Once the train has stopped  the player can switch to Manual Mode to try to r
158. ion  The tilting of the passenger cab allows greater values of unbalanced super elevation to  be used     8 10 9 Limitation of Velocity on Curved Track at Zero Cross Level   The concept of maximum comfortable velocity may also be used to determine the maximum  velocity at which rolling stock is permitted to round curved track without super elevation and  maintained at zero cross level  The lead curve of a turnout located between the heel of the switch  and the toe of the frog is an example of curved track that is generally not super elevated  Other  similar locations would include yard tracks and industrial tracks where the increased velocity  capability made possible by super elevation is not required  In such circumstances the maximum  comfortable velocity for a given curve may also be the maximum velocity permitted on tangent  track adjoining the curve     8 10 10 Height of Centre of Gravity   Operation on a curve at equilibrium velocity results in the centre of gravity of the rolling stock  coinciding with a point on a line that is perpendicular to a line across the running rails and the  origin of which is midway between the rails  Under this condition the height of the centre of gravity  is of no consequence as the resulting force Fr coincides with the perpendicular line described  above  When rolling stock stops on a super elevated curve or rounds a curve under any condition  of non equilibrium the resulting force Fr will not coincide with the perpendicular line previo
159. ion of problem  supplemented by screenshots etc    e Content used  Route  Activity  Path  Consist  Locomotive  amp  Rolling Stock  choose  applicable   Freeware   Payware   Package name  amp  download location   download  link   e Narrative of actions shortly before  amp  at time of problem  supplemented by screenshots  etc    e Attach log file  Desktop  OpenRailsLog txt    e Add further info only in additional posts   e Be patient   19 6 2 Decided Bug   e Report to Bug Tracker only if asked to do so   e https   ougs Launchpad net or   Registration required    gt   Report a bug    e  Summary   Description from the topic title of the Maybe Bug report    Page 197 of 206    Look for similar  already reported bugs   Condense whole Maybe Bug thread into  Further information  field  Add link to original Maybe Bug report   Re upload and attach OpenRailsLog txt  amp  explanatory screenshots etc   Add further info only in additional posts   Be patient    19 7 Bug Status in Launchpad    New   this is where all bugs start  At this point  the bug has not been looked at by the  right people to check whether it is complete or if more details are needed     Incomplete   a member of the Open Rails teams has decided that the bug needs  more information before it can be fixed  The person who created the bug report does  not have to be the one to provide the extra details  A bug remaining incomplete for 60  consecutive days is automatically removed     Opinion   the bug has been identified as a
160. ist     If this train sometimes has some additional wagons  e g  during rush hours  the consists  can be defined as follows  with c_add the definition of the additional wagons       c_loco   c_wagons   c_add   and for reverse   c_loco  reverse   c_add  reverse    c_wagons  reverse    Clearly  this can save on the definition of the total required consists  and in particular  saves the tedious task of having to define  reverse  consists   When using multiple units  this is even more useful     Suppose there are two sets of multiple units  running either as single trains or combined   Normally  six different consists would be required to cover all trains  but now only two will    Page 155 of 206    suffice   set_a and set_b   The various combinations are      set_a  reverse set_a  reverse   set_b   reverse set_b  reverse   set_a   set_b  reverse set_b  reverse   set_a  reverse     Consist strings which contain     or     can be used in timetables but must be enclosed  by  lt   gt   For instance       lt loco wagon gt   lt  loco wagon gt  reverse    e  Start row    The  start row defines the time at which the train is started  It must be defined as HH mm   and the 24 hour clock must be used  This field is compulsory     Use of start time for Al trains      When a train is formed out of another train and this other train is included to run in the  timetable  the time defined in  start is only used to define when the train becomes  active     Use of start time for player train    T
161. iting points can only be used in Activity mode     e Al trains throw switches not lined properly before engaging them     e In activity mode Al trains can perform shunting actions  provided the    Extended Al  shunting    option has been selected     e Priorities  Al trains should start as scheduled as long as there is no other Al train  already on a conflict path     Page 122 of 206    10 3 Control Mode  Control Mode defines what interactions there are between the player and the control system  and  the level of control of the player on signals and switches     There are two basic modes  Auto Mode and Manual Mode   Use the Ctrl M key to toggle between these modes     10 3 1 Auto Mode   In Auto Mode the control system sets the train   s path and signals  and the player cannot change  the setting of the switches or request for signals at danger to clear  The train   s route is taken from  the path as defined in the Activity Editor or timetable definition  and the system will attempt to clear  the route ahead of the train according to the signalling rules and interaction with other trains     No route is cleared in the reverse direction as the train is assumed not to run in reverse  Selecting  a reverse cab or changing the position of the reverser does not change the direction of the route   In fact  the route will not be reversed other than at reversal points as defined in the train   s path  At  these reversal points  the route will reverse automatically as soon as the train 
162. itor  This option is described in detail  here  theory  and also here  OR application      6 4 6 Tunnel dependent resistance   When this option is selected  OR takes into account the fact that trains in tunnels are subject to  higher air resistance  and therefore need a higher effort at invariant speed  This option is  described in detail here  theory  and here  OR application      6 4 7 Override non electrified route line voltage  This option allows running  in a non prototypical way  electric locomotives on non electrified  routes     6 4 8 Steam locomotive hot start   This option allows starting the game with the boiler water temperature already at a value that  allows running the locomotive  If the option is not selected  you will have to wait until the water  temperature reaches a high enough value     Page 23 of 206    6 5 Keyboard Options    xi     General   Audio   Video   Simulation Keyboard   pata logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater   Experimental      Pause Menu  Esae tt     ssts          SOOCS T  Save Roo  qitfat F4                  i      C  Pause Pause ss            sS  Screenshot   PrintSaeen  Fullscreen  Alt  Enter ss     swtchAhead e oS  Switch Behind  Shift 6  Switch Picked jees 0        i   sSCSSCis  signal Picked  convoi  6 SSCS  Switch With Mouse ft  Uncouple With Mouse booo  Change Cab  Control  E o    o  Check   Defaults        In this panel you will find listed the keyboard keys that are associated with all OR commands     You can modify them by cl
163. ius  rigid wheel base  track gauge and super  elevation  The curve resistance has its lowest value at the curve s optimal speed  Running at    Page 70 of 206    higher or lower speed causes higher curve resistance  The worst situation is starting a train from  zero speed  The track gauge value can be set by ORTSTrackGauge parameter  otherwise 1435  mm is used  The rigid wheel base can be also set by ORTSRigidWheelBase  otherwise the value  is estimated  Further details are discussed later     When running on a slope  uphill or downhill   additional resistance is calculated based on the car  mass taking into account the elevation of the car itself  Interaction with the    car vibration feature    is  a known issue  if the car vibrates the resistance value oscillate      8 1 2 Coupler Slack  Slack action for couplers is introduced and calculated the same way as in MSTS     8 1 3 Adhesion of Locomotives     Settings Within the Wagon Section of ENG files  MSTS calculates the adhesion parameters based on a very strange set of parameters filled with  an even stranger range of values  Since ORTS is not able to mimic the MSTS calculation  a  standard method based on the adhesion theory is used with some known issues in use with MSTS  content     MSTS    Adheasion     sic  parameters are not used in ORTS  A new set of parameters is used  instead     ORTSAdhesion   ORTSCurtius_Kniffler  A B C D        The A  B and C values are coefficients of a standard form of various empirical formul
164. l  amp  scripting capabilities are supported    e Speedpost   dat  file     Supported   e Spotter   dat  file     Supported    Page 6 of 206    e Ssource   dat  file     Supported  e Telepole   dat  file     Supported  e Tsection   dat  file   Supported  e Ttype   dat  file     Supported   e Hazards   haz  file   Supported    4 6 Environment  Open Rails software does not support advanced water dynamic effects at this time  while it  supports first level  player driven dynamic weather effects     Open Rails provides two types of environment representation that can be selected by the player at  game start  a MSTS compatible one and a native one     In the native version Open Rails software uses its own sky  cloud  sun  moon and precipitation  effects developed exclusively for it  In activity mode the starting parameters for time of day and  weather are read from the activity file to determine the starting display in Open Rails software     4 7 Activities  Open Rails software runs without problems a great percentage of the passenger and freight  activities created using the MSTS activity editor  It also offers some OR_ specific options to add  interesting features to existing activities     4 8 OR Folder Structure  Open Rails uses a subset of the MSTS folder structure to run     The following folders  together with their related sub folders  are needed at root level     e GLOBAL  e ROUTES  e TRAINS  e SOUND    At root level no files are needed     Within the GLOBAL folder the fo
165. l affects the design and operation of  trains  and they are a source of energy losses  noise  vibrations and aural discomfort for  passengers     These problems are even worse when two or more trains are in a tunnel at the same time  Aural  comfort is one of the major factors determining the area of new tunnels or the maximum train  speed in existing tunnels     Page 113 of 206    8 12 3 Importance of Tunnel Profile   As described above  a train travelling through a tunnel will create a bow wave of air movement in  front of it  which is similar to a    piston    effect  The magnitude and impact of this effect will  principally be determined by the tunnel profile  train profile and speed     Typical tunnel profiles are shown in the diagrams below            Train Cross Train Cross  Section Area Section Area    Train Cross  Section Area       As can be seen from these diagrams the smaller the tunnel cross sectional area compared to the  train cross sectional area  the less air that can    escape    around the train  and hence the greater  the resistance experienced by the train  Thus it can be understood that a single train in a double  track tunnel will experience less resistance then a single train in a single track tunnel     8 12 4 Calculation of Tunnel Resistance                      Wt     AL  pali 1   P G   where  y  0 000 033 18yF     F  FY   A    2  B  174 419 1   F  I FY   c  2 907 E Fd  4F   R   F      tunnel cross sectional area  sqm    Fy     train cross sectional 
166. l crossings  If a horn blow is also desired for    a   simple    road crossing  the feature    Al Train Horn Blow     described above  must be used     10 16 4 Activity Location Sound File    An activity file can be modified so that a sound file is played when the train reaches a location    specified in an EventTypeLocation event in the  act file  Add the line     ORTSActSoundFile   Filename SoundType      to the EventCategoryLocation event  where     Filename   name  in quotations  of a  wav file located in the SOUND folder of the route   Soundtype   any one of the strings        Everywhere        sound is played in all views at the same volume without fading effects       Cab        sound is played only in the cab     Pass        sound is played only in the active passenger view       Ground      sound is played externally from a fixed position  the one that the  locomotive has reached when the event is triggered  The sound is also heard in internal    views in an attenuated way  and becomes attenuated by moving away from the position     For example        EventCategoryLocation    EventTypeLocation              ID   7    Activation Level  1    Outcomes    DisplayMessage    This message won t be shown because    ORTSContinue   0           Name   Location6     Location    146 14082  1016 56 762 16 10     TriggerOnStop   0     ORTSContinue   0     ORTSActSoundFile    x Next stop MiClei wav   Pass          Including the ORTSContinue line  explained above  inhibits the normal 
167. l enterprises   open to the community and  best of all  an open door to the future     3 2 About Open Rails  To take advantage of almost a decade of content developed by the train simulation community   Open Rails software is an independent game platform that has backward compatibility with MSTS  content  By leveraging the community   s knowledge base on how to develop content for MSTS   Open Rails software provides a rich environment for both community and payware contributors     The primary objective of the Open Rails project is to create a railroad simulator that will provide     true to life    operational experience  The Open Rails software is aimed at the serious train  simulation hobbyist  someone who cares about locomotive physics  train handling  signals  Al  behavior  dispatching  and most of all running trains in a realistic  prototypical manner  While the  project team will strive to deliver an unparalleled graphical experience     eye candy    is not the  primary objective of Open Rails software     By developing a completely new railroad simulator  Open Rails software offers the potential to  better utilize current and next generation computer resources  like graphics processing units   GPUs   multi core CPUs  advanced APIs such as PhysX  and widescreen monitors  among many  others  The software is published so that the user community can understand how the software  functions to facilitate feedback and to improve the capabilities of Open Rails software     Ope
168. l wagons     e Speed     the speed of the train around the curve will impact upon the value of  resistance  typically above and below the equilibrium speed  i e  when all the wheels  of the rolling stock are perfectly aligned between the tracks   See the section below     Impact of superelevation        The impact of wind resistance on curve friction is ignored     8 8 3 Impact of Rigid Wheelbase   The length of the rigid wheelbase of rolling stock will impact the value of curve resistance   Typically rolling stock with longer rigid wheelbases will experience a higher degree of    rubbing    or  frictional resistance on tight curves  compared to stock with smaller wheelbases     Steam locomotives usually created the biggest problem in regard to this as their drive wheels  tended to be in a single rigid wheelbase as shown in Fig 1  In some instances on routes with  tighter curve the    inside    wheels of the locomotive were sometimes made flangeless to allow them  to    float    across the track head  Articulated locomotives  such as Shays  tended to have their drive  wheels grouped in bogies similar to diesel locomotives and hence were favoured for routes with  tight curves     The value used for the rigid wheelbase is shown as W in Fig 1         Diagram Source   The Baldwin Locomotive Works   Locomotive Data   1944     Figure 1   Example of Rigid Wheelbase in steam locomotive    8 8 4 Impact of Super Elevation   On any curve whose outer rail is super elevated there is  for 
169. lCam and PassengerCam   in general OR does not consider which cameras are explicitly  activated within the  sms files  Instead  it uses a sort of implicit activation  that as a general rule  works as follows     e when in an inside view  cabview or passenger view  the related inside  sms files are  heard  plus all external  sms files  with the exception of those related to the trainset  where the camera is in that moment   the volume of those external files is attenuated  by a 0 75 factor     e when in an external view all external  sms files are heard     For an  sms file to be heard  it must be within the activation distance defined in the related  instruction     A hack is available so as to hear only in the cabview some  sms files residing outside the cabview  trainset  This can be used e g  to implement radio messages  For this to work the related  sms file  must be called within a  wag file  must contain an Activation   CabCam   statement  and the  related wagon must be within a loose consist  within a not yet started Al train or within the consist  where the cabview trainset resides     The ScalabiltyGroup    instruction behaves differently from MSTS for Al trains  While MSTS uses  ScalabiltyGroup   0   for Al trains  OR uses for Al trains the same ScalabiltyGroup used for player  trains  This way Al train sound can profit from the many more triggers active for Al trains in ORTS   For instance  Variable2 trigger is not active in MSTS for Al trains  while it is in ORTS 
170. lCock BleedOff  0 0 1P 10 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release T A  B    0 1 1P 10 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release A  B    32884   0 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release A  B    32884   1 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release A  B    32884   2 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release A  B        If you don   t want to wait for the train brake line to charge  pressing Shift    in English keyboards   executes    Brakes Initialize    which will immediately fully charge the train brakes line to the final  state  However  this action is not prototypical and also does not allow control of the brake  retainers     The state of the angle cocks  the hose connections and the air brake pressure of individual  coupled cars can be manipulated by using the F9 Train Operations Monitor  described here  This  will permit more realistic shunting of cars in freight yards     8 6 1 2 Uncoupling Cars    When uncoupling cars from a consist  using the F5 HUD Expanded Brake Display in conjunction  with the F9 Train Operations Monitor display allows the player to set the handbrakes on the cars to  be uncoupled  and to uncouple them without losing the air pressure in the remaining cars  Before  uncoupling  close the angle cock at the rear of the car ahead of the first car to be uncoupled so  that the air pressure in the remaining consist is not lost when the air hoses to the uncoupled cars  are disconnected  If this procedure is not followed  the train braking system will go into     Emergency    state and
171. lling takes  place as the key is held down  If the locomotive is further away  then the distance to the nearest  pickup is given instead    7 3 5 Specific Features to Optimize Locomotive Driving   You are encouraged to read the chapter on Open Rails Physics to optimize your driving  capabilities and to achieve a realistic feeling of what happens in a real moving train     7 3 6 Examples of Driving Controls   for content developers    For continuous throttle  see MSTS model     TRAINS TRAINSET ACELA acela eng   For a notched non smooth throttle  see      TRAINS TRAINSET GP38 gp38  eng   For a combined throttle and dynamic brake  see       TRAINS TRAINSET  DASH9 dash9  eng    For a combined throttle and train brake  see        MSTS TRAINS  TRAINSET SERIES7000 series7Q    eng    Page 35 of 206    7 4 Driving aids  Open Rails provides a large number of driving aids  which support the player during train  operation     7 4 1 Basic Head Up Display  HUD   By pressing F5 you get some important data displayed at the top left of the display in the so called  Head Up Display  HUD   If you want the HUD to disappear  press F5 again     The HUD has 6 different pages  The basic page is shown at game start  To sequentially switch to  the other pages press Shift F5  After having cycled through all of the extended HUD pages  the  basic page is displayed again     To hide or redisplay the current extended HUD data while continuing to show the basic HUD   press Alt F5     The basic page shows fu
172. llowing sub folders are needed if global  shared among more than  one route  shapes and textures are used     e SHAPES  e TEXTURES    Within the GLOBAL folder only the file tsection dat is absolutely needed  Files sigcfg dat and  sigscr dat are needed if there are routes that don t have their own specific files with the same  names in their root folder     Page 7 of 206    4 9 Which Original MSTS Content Files Are Usually Needed To Run MSTS Compatible  Content Generated by Third Parties   A general summary of which original MSTS content files within the Train Simulator root folders are  usually used by MSTS compatible content follows     e GLOBAL root folder   Many routes use specific track sets  like XTRACK  UK finescale etc     Routes which solely use such sets do not need any of the original MSTS files from GLOBAL   as all required files come from the relevant track set  There are however also many routes  using original MSTS track sets  These routes will need part or all the files contained in the  SHAPES and TEXTURES subfolders within the GLOBAL folder     e ROUTES root folder   In principle  to run a route only that specific route folder is required     However  many routes   in particular freeware routes   use much material from the original  MSTS routes  and therefore the original MSTS routes need to be available in order to  properly install these routes     e TRAINS root folder     Requirements are similar to routes  Again  only the folders for the trainsets which a
173. ly  valid  as a passing location if at least one of the trains fits into the  shortest of the available passing paths     e The order in which passing paths are selected    If no train is approaching from the opposite direction  through route     Train s own path    Main  path   Any alternative path     If train is to pass another train approaching from the opposite direction  passing route     Train s own path  if not the same as  main  path    Alternative path    Main  path     However  in the situation where the train does not fit on all paths  for the first train to claim a path  through the area  preference is given to the paths  if any  where the train will fit     The setting of the    deadlock    trap  the logic which prevents trains from getting on a single track  from both directions  has also been changed     In the  old  version  the trap was    sprung    as a train claimed its path through a possible passing  area     However  this often lead to quite early blocking of trains in the opposite direction   In this version the trap is  sprung  when a train actually claims its path in the single track section  itself     One slight flaw in this logic is that this can lead to the train which is to wait being allocated to the   main  path  while the train which can pass is directed over the  loop   This can happen when two  trains approach a single track section at almost the same time  each one claiming its path through  the passing areas at either end before the deadl
174. ly increased the  heating area of the locomotive     Geared Locomotives    In industrial type railways  such as those used in the logging industry  spurs to coal mines were  often built to very cheap standards  As a consequence  depending upon the terrain  they were  often laid with sharp curves and steep gradients compared to normal  main line standards      Typical  main line  rod type locomotives couldn t be used on these lines due to their long fixed  wheelbase  coupled wheels  and their relatively low tractive effort was no match for the steep  gradients  Thus geared locomotives found their niche in railway practice     Geared locomotives typically used bogie wheelsets  which allowed the rigid wheelbase to be  reduced compared to that of rod type locomotives  thus allowing the negotiation of tight curves  In  addition the gearing allowed an increase of their tractive effort to handle the steeper gradients  compared to main line tracks     Whilst the gearing allowed more tractive effort to be produced  it also meant that the  maximum   piston speed was reached at a lower track speed     As suggested above  the maximum track speed would depend upon loads and track conditions     Page 85 of 206    As these types of lines were lightly laid  excessive speeds could result in derailments  etc   The three principal types of geared locomotives used were    e Shay Locomotives   e Climax   e Heisler    8 4 2 Steam Locomotive Operation  To successfully drive a steam locomotive it is
175. ly sharing the rolling stock weight    or coming to a complete stop on  curves  Under such circumstances excess super elevation may lead to a downward force sufficient  to damage the inside rail of the curve  or cause derailment of rolling stock toward the centre of the  curve when draft force is applied to a train  Routine operation of loaded freight trains at low  velocity on a curve superelevated to permit operation of higher velocity passenger trains will result  in excess wear of the inside rail of the curve by the freight trains     Thus on these types of routes  super elevation is generally limited to no more than 6 inches     8 10 7 Limitation of Super Elevation in High Speed Passenger Routes   Modern high speed passenger routes do not carry slower speed trains  nor expect trains to stop  on curves  so it is possible to operate these routes with higher track super elevation values   Curves on these types of route are also designed with a relatively gentle radius  and are typically  in excess of 2000m  2km  or 7000m  7km  depending on the speed limit of the route     Parameters France Germany Spain Korea Japan   Speed  km h  300 350 300 350 300 350 350   Horizontal curve radius 10000 7000  7km  7000  7km  7000 4000  4km     m   10km   7km    Super elevation  mm  180 170 150 130 180   Max Grade  mm m  35 40 12 5 25 15   Cant Gradient  mm s  50 34 7 32 N A N A   Min Vertical radius  m  16000 14000 24000 N A 10000   16km   14km   24km   10km     Table 1   Curve Parameters
176. main Open  Rails window  and Alt Tab switches between it and the Open Rails window  See the related option     Fast full screen Alt Tab        Through this window you can monitor train movements and also influence them  by setting signals  and switches  A complete description of the dispatcher window can be found here     o     a DispatchViewer     mem          Res  2091   m     Draw Path  IV Pick Signals  I Pick Switches    See in Game    3  w  Follow        a       EA  ae    Regiv   da_Lecco_Monza        4    aAstaManovracorta  Prece lenze Sud    staManovra    AstaManovracorta    6 1 3 Graduated release air brakes   Selecting this option allows a partial release of the brakes  Generally speaking  operating with the  option checked is equivalent to passenger standard and unchecked is equivalent to freight  standard  A complete description of this option can be found here      6 1 4 Large address aware binaries   It is suggested to leave this option checked  When it is unchecked  Open Rails can use a  maximum of 2 GB of RAM  When it is checked  the maximum is 4 GB for 64 bit Windows systems   and 2 or 3 GB for 32 bit Windows systems  To increase the maximum RAM used by OR in 32 bit    Page 14 of 206    Windows systems from 2 to 3 GB see the information found here     Take note that the RAM increase from 2 to 3 GB in 32 bit systems can slow down computer  operation when not using OR     Following MSTS practice  whenever you make adjustments to the train controls  e g  open the
177. mergency reservoir     Increasing the Brake Pipe Charging Rate  PS  Second  value controls the charging rate   Increasing the value will reduce the time required to recharge the train  while decreasing the  value will slow the charging rate  However  this might be limited by the train brake controller  parameter settings in the ENG file  The brake pipe pressure cannot go up faster than that of  the equalization reservoir     The default value  21  should cause the recharge time from a full set to be about 1 minute for every  12 cars  If the Brake Pipe Charging Rate  PSI Second  value is set to 1000  the pipe pressure  gradient features will be disabled and will also disable some but not all of the other new brake  features     Brake system charging time depends on the train length as it should  but at the moment there is no  modeling of main reservoirs and compressors     8 6 1 Using the F5 HUD Expanded Braking Information   This helps users of Open Rails to understand the status of braking within the game and assists in  realistically coupling and uncoupling cars  Open Rails braking physics is more realistic than MSTS   as it models the connection  charging and exhaust of brake lines     When coupling to a static consist  note that the brake line for the newly added cars normally does  not have any pressure  This is because the train brake line hose has not yet been connected  The  last columns of each line shows the condition of the air brake hose connections of each unit i
178. mpulsory     out_time   optional    Page 165 of 206    In combination with  forms       out_path   compulsory   out_time   optional   in_path   compulsory   in_time   optional   runround   optional     rrtime   optional  only valid if  runround is set   rrpos   compulsory if  runround is set  otherwise not valid    In combination with  triggers       out_path   compulsory   out_time   optional   in_path   compulsory   in_time   optional    11 5 Additional Notes on Timetables    11 5 1 Static Trains   A static train can be defined by setting  static in the top row  e g  as the  name  of that train    Consist and path are still required   the path is used to determine where the consist is placed  rear  end of train at start of path     No start time is required    The train will be created from the start of the timetable   but it cannot be used for anything within a  timetable  It cannot be referenced in any command etc   as it has no name  At present  it is also  not possible to couple to a static train   see below for details    Note that there are some differences between timetable and activity mode in the way that static  trains are generated    In activity mode  the train is an instance of the Train class  with type STATIC    In timetable mode  the train is an instance of the TTTrain class  as are all trains in timetable  mode   with type Al  movement Al_ STATIC    This difference may lead to different behaviour with respect to sound  smoke and lights     11 5 2 Processing
179. ms  flightsim com vbts   e UK Train Sim http   forums uktrainsim com index php  e Elvas Tower http   www elvastower com forums index php  index    For users interested in multiplayer sessions  a forum is set up for you to seek and announce  hosting sessions  http   www tsimserver com    The Open Rails team is NOT planning on hosting a forum on the Open Rails website  We believe  that the best solution is for the current train simulation forum sites to remain the destination for  users who want to discuss topics relating to Open Rails software  The Open Rails team monitors  and actively participates in these forums     Page 4 of 206    3 5 Highlights of the Current Version  3 5 1 Focus on Compatibility  With this release the announced goal has been reached to make as much of the existing MSTS  content as possible run in Open Rails  The development team s initial focus has been to provide a  fairly complete visual replacement for MSTS that effectively builds on that content  achieving all  the compatibility that is worthwhile  at the same time delivering a system which is faster and  more robust than MSTS     3 5 2 Focus on Operations   Release 1 0 clears the way to improving on MSTS in many ways which can be summed up as  moving from Foundation to Realism and eventually to Independence  and already includes  features that are beyond MSTS  Non player trains can already have a first release movement  orders  i e  pickups  drop offs  based on files in MSTS format  Deadlocks betwe
180. n  100 000 polys have been developed and displayed without problems     2  Thanks to the additional physics description parameters  a much more realistic behavior of the  rolling stock is achieved     3  3D cabs add realism   4  OR graphics renders the results of the rolling stock developers at higher resolution     5  Rolling stock running on super elevated track improves gaming experience     17 2 Routes  1  Routes are displayed in higher resolution     2  Extended viewing distance yields much more realism   3  Double overhead wire increases the realism of electrified routes     4  Extended signaling features provide more realistic signal behavior     17 3 Activities  1  Timetable mode is a new activity type available only in Open Rails that allows for development  of timetable based gaming sessions     2  By using the dispatcher monitor window  the dispatcher HUD  and the ability to switch the  camera to any Al train  the player can more closely monitor and control the execution of  conventional activities     3  Extended Al shunting greatly increases the interactions between trains   4  New ORP specific additions to activity   act  files enhance activities     17 4 Testing and Debugging Tools    As listed here  a rich and powerful set of analysis tools eases the testing and debugging of content  under development     Page 192 of 206    17 5 Open Rails Best Practices  17 5 1 Polys vs  Draw Calls     What   s Important  Poly counts are still important in Open Rails software
181. n  Initially  dynamic braking was applied in mountainous territory where  conventional freight car brakes were prone to overheating on long downgrades  It was also limited  to speeds above 10mph  Dynamic braking controls are usually notched     In OR  the dynamic brake  controlled by the keys   and     is not available unless the throttle is  fully closed  similarly the throttle is not available unless the dynamic brake is fully released  off      As defined in the CVF file  the tractive and braking forces may be shown on two different  instruments  on one instrument with two needles or on a single instrument where the braking is  shown as a negative value     Page 34 of 206    7 3 3 Combined Control    Some locomotives are fitted with a  combined control  where a single lever is used to provide  throttle and brake control together  with negative throttle positions used to apply the brake  The  brake element may be either dynamic or conventional train brakes     There may be a delay changing between throttle and brake operation  representing the time  required to change the operation of the traction motors from motors to generators   7 3 4 Refill    Diesel and steam locomotives must refill their supplies of fuel occasionally  perhaps daily  but  steam locomotives need water more frequently and have a range of little more than 100 miles   Use the  T  key to refill with fuel or water     If the locomotive or tender is alongside the pickup point  e g  a water tank  then the refi
182. n  To directly select which train is to be shown use the Dispatcher Window   In this window  locate the train that you wish to view  and click the mouse on it until  the block representing it turns red  then click on the button    Show in game    in the  Dispatcher Window and then return to the Open Rails window     e Key 9 resets the target train for the Key 2 3 4 5 and 6 views to the Player train     Holding the Shift key with any motion command speeds up the movement  while the Ctrl key slows  it     Note that view direction control using the mouse with right button pressed differs slightly from  using Alt plus the arrow keys     the view direction can pass through the zenith or nadir  and the  direction of vertical motion is then reversed  Passing back through the zenith or nadir restores  normal behavior     Whenever frame rates fall to unacceptable levels players are advised to adjust camera positions to  cull some models from being in view and to adjust the camera again to include more models when  frame rates are high     7 9 Toggling Between Windowed Mode and Full screen  You can toggle at any time between windowed mode and full screen by pressing Alt Enter     7 10 Modifying the Game Environment  7 10 1 Time of Day    When in activity mode Open Rails software reads the StartTime from the MSTS  act file to  determine what the game time is for the activity  In combination with the longitude and latitude of  the route and the season  Open Rails computes the actual sun 
183. n Rails is published under the GPL license which is  copyleft   to ensure that the source code  always remains publicly available        http   www gnu org copyleft     Page 3 of 206    3 3 Does Open Rails Need MSTS to Run   This is not a correctly set question  Open Rails is able to run a vast majority of MSTS content   routes  trains  activities   Open Rails does not need MSTS executable files  e g   exe or  dll files    neither does it need  ini files     However  if the MSTS content uses content files originally delivered with MSTS  such as tracks or  general sounds  this applies in particular to routes   obviously to run such content OR needs such  files     If instead  and there are examples of this  the MSTS content does not use such original content  files  again obviously OR does not need original MSTS files  Read here for further detail     In both cases  MSTS content files  original and not  must be organized in an MSTS compatible  folder structure  Such a structure is described here  In this manual such a folder structure will be  called an    MSTS installation    for clarity  even if this wording is not completely correct     A proof that Open Rails itself does not need an MSTS installation at all to run is e g  this route     3 4 Community  At the present time  Open Rails software is offered without technical support  Therefore  users are  encouraged to use their favorite train simulation forums to get support from the community     e   Train Sim Com http   foru
184. n be route linked     The actual use is defined in the related script and the related shape definition     Example 2      SignalType    SpeedReset   SignalFnType   SPEED    SignalLightTex    Itex       SignalDrawStates   1  SignalDrawState   0   Red           SignalAspects   1  SignalAspect   STOP  Red  signalflags  OR_SPEEDRESET          SignalNumClearAhead   2      This example resets the speed to the limit as set by the last speed sign  overruling any speed  limits set by signal aspects     10 15 3 Approach control functions   Approach control signals are used  specifically in the UK  to keep a signal at  danger  until the train  is within a specific distance ahead of the signal  or has reduced its speed to a specific value  Such  control is used for diverging routes  to ensure the speed of the train is reduced sufficiently to safely  negotiate the switches onto the diverging route     Two script functions for use in OR have been defined which can be used to control the signal until  the train has reached a specific position or has reduced its speed     Page 140 of 206    These functions are    e APPROACH_CONTROL_POSITION position   e APPROACH_CONTROL_SPEED position  speed     These functions are Boolean functions  the returned value is    true    if a train is approaching the  signal and is within the required distance of the signal and  for ARPPROACH_CONTROL_SPEED   has reduced its speed below the required values     Parameters     position   required distance of train a
185. n is identified by the    PLAYER    string  or by a    0    if autopilot mode is enabled   Al  trains  are identified by their OR number  that is also shown in the    Extended HUD for Dispatcher  Information      followed by the service name  Static consists are identified as in MSTS     The state of the signals is shown  only three states are drawn  that is  e Stop     drawn in red  e Clear_2  drawn in green  e while all signals with restricting aspect are drawn in yellow     The state of the switches is also shown  A switch shown with a black dot indicates the main route   while a grey dot indicates a side route     When the    Draw path    is checked  the first part of the path that the train will follow is drawn in red   If a trailing switch in the path is not in the correct position for the path  a red X is shown on it     When left  or right clicking on a signal  a pop up menu appears  System Controlled    i Sto   Using the mouse  you can force the signal to Stop  Approach paas   or Proceed  Later you can return it to System Controlled mode  Proceed    By left  or right clicking on a switch  a small pop up menu with the two selections    Main route    and     Side route    appears  By clicking on them you can throw the switch  provided the OR Al dispatcher  allows it     With respect to Al trains  as a general rule you can command their signals but not their switches   because Al trains are not allowed to exit their path     The two checkboxes    Pick Signals    and    
186. n opinion  meaning that it isn t clear  whether there is actually a bug or how things should be behaving     Invalid   a member of the team believes that the report is not actually a bug report   This may be because Open Rails is working as designed and expected or it could just  be spam  The bug may be put back to the new state if further information or clarity is  provided in comments     Won t Fix   a member of the team has decided that this bug will not be fixed at this  time  If the bug report is a  feature request   then they have decided that the feature  isn t desired right now  This status does not mean something will never happen but  usually a better reason for fixing the bug or adding the feature will be needed first     Confirmed   a member of the team has been able to experience the bug as well  by  following the instructions in the bug report     Triaged     a member of the team has assigned the importance level to the bug or has  assigned it to a specific milestone  Bugs generally need to get to this state before the  developers will want to look at them in detail     In Progress   one or more members of the team are currently planning to or actually  working on the bug report  They will be identified by the assignee field     Fix Committed   the fix for the bug report or feature request has been completed and  checked in to the source control system  Subversion  Once there  the fix will usually  appear in the next experimental release     Fix Released   The c
187. n pictorially in the following graph  Open Rails uses the    Page 104 of 206    following formula to model the speed impact on curve resistance     SpeedFactor ABS  EquilibriumSpeed TrainSpeed  EquilibriumSpeed   ResistanceFactor   start    Resistance           Empty wagons        Loaded wagons       Speed    Figure 3   Generalisation of Variation of Curve Resistance With Speed    8 8 7 Further background reading  http   en wikipedia org wiki Curve resistance  railroad    8 9 Curve Resistance   Application in OR  Open Rails models this function  and the user may elect to specify the known wheelbase  parameters  or the above    standard    default values will be used  OR calculates the equilibrium  speed in the speed curve module  however it is not necessary to select both of these functions in  the simulator options TAB  Only select the function desired  By studying the    Forces Information     table in the HUD  you will be able to observe the change in curve resistance as the speed  curve  radius  etc  vary     8 9 1 OR Parameter Values  Typical OR parameter values may be entered in the Wagon section of the  wag or  eng file  and  are formatted as below     ORTSRigidWheelBase   3in    ORTSTrackGauge   4ft 8 5in   also used in curve speed module     Page 105 of 206    8 9 2 OR Default Values  The above values can be entered into the relevant files  or alternatively if they are not present   then OR will use the default values described below     Rigid Wheelbase     as a defa
188. n the  consist     BRAKE INFORMATION   Main reservoir 135 psi   Car Type BrkCyl BrkPipe AuxRes ErgRes MRPipe RetValve TripleValve Handbrk Conn AngiCock BleedOff  0 0 1P 11 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release T A  B    0 1 1P 11 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release A  B     32884   0 1P 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi Emergency 100  A  B               32884   1 1P 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi Emergency 100  T A  B   T    32884  2 1P 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi 0 psi Emergency 100  A  B     The columns under    AnglCock    describe the state of the    Angle Cock     a manually operated valve  in each of the brake hoses of a car  A is the cock at the front  B is the cock at the rear of the car     The symbol         indicates that the cock is open and the symbol         that it is closed  The column    Page 98 of 206    headed by    T    indicates if the hose on the locomotive or car is interconnected     T    means that  there is no connection     I    means it is connected to the air pressure line  If the angle cocks of two  consecutive cars are B  and A  respectively  they will pass the main air hose pressure between  the two cars  In this example note that the locomotive air brake lines start with A   closed  and end  with B   closed  before the air hoses are connected to the newly coupled cars  All of the newly  coupled cars in this example have their angle cocks open  including those at the ends  so their  brake pressures are zero  This will be reported as    Emergency    state     8 6 1 1 Coupling Car
189. n the files sigcfg dat and sigscr dat in a way that is highly  compatible to MSTS     10 14 1 SignalNumClearAhead  Specific rules  however  apply to the sigcfg dat parameter SignalNumClearAhead     that is not  managed in a consistent way by MSTS     If for a SignalType only one SignalNumClearAhead    is defined  as is standard in MSTS files    such a parameter defines the number of NORMAL signal heads  not signals   that are cleared  down the route  including the signal heads of the signal where the SignalType resides     If for a SignalType a second SignalNumClearAhead    parameter is added just before the existing  one  OR interprets it as the number of NORMAL SIGNALS that are cleared down the route   including the signal where the SignalType resides     MSTS will skip this first SignalNumClearAhead    and will consider only the second  In this way  this change to sigcfg dat does not affect its use in MSTS     However  instead of modifying the copy of the file sigcfg dat residing in the route   s root  the  approach described in the next paragraph is recommended     10 14 2 Location of OR specific sigcfg and sigscr files  OR specific  sigcfg and  sigscr files must be put into a subfolder    OpenRails    created within the    main folder of the route  Sigcfg dat must maintain its name  while the sigscr files can also have  other names  provided that within sigcfg dat there is a reference to such other names     10 15 OR specific Signaling Functions  A set of powerful OR spe
190. n the next paragraphs     OR adds support for the ETCS circular speed gauge  as described here     15 2 High resolution Cab Backgrounds and Controls  In MSTS the resolution of the cab background image is limited to 1024x1024  this limitation does  not apply in OR as the result of OR s better handling of large textures     2D cab backgrounds can reach at least to 3072x3072  however very fine results can be obtained  with a resolution of 2560x1600  The image does not have to be square     2D cab animations have also been greatly improved  you are reminded here that there are two  types of animated rotary gauges  i e  normal gauges and general animations using multiple  frames  In this second case in MSTS all of the frames had to be present in a single texture with a  max resolution of 640x480  In OR these frames can be as large as one likes and OR will scale  them to the correct size  In general it is not necessary to use a resolution greater than 200x200 for  every frame     The syntax to be used in the  cvf file is the standard one as defined by MSTS   To clarify this  the position parameters of a sample needle block are described here     In the  Position  statement  the first 2 numbers are the position of the top left hand side of the  needle texture in cabview units with the needle in the vertical position  In the Dial type the last 2  numbers are the size of the needle texture  The last number  50 in the example  controls the  scaling of the needle texture  i e  changing 
191. n the rear  two cases are possible  either the decoupled part  reverses or the decoupled part continues in the same direction  In the first case a reversal  point has to be put anywhere in the section where the decoupling occurs  better towards the  end of the section   and OR will move it to the right place so that the train reverses at the  point where decoupling occurred  moreover it is also advised to put a WP of some tens of  seconds  so that the train does not restart immediately  This WP must be located logically  after the reversal point  and in the same track section  OR will move it under the decoupled    Page 137 of 206    train   If the decoupled part continues in the same direction  neither WP nor RP are needed  This  train part will wait that the part ahead will clear the path before starting     Activity run hints     When you run as player  you have to uncouple the train where foreseen by the activity  the  uncoupled train must lay in a route section present in its path   If you don t uncouple on a track  section present in the path of the uncoupled train  the uncoupled train will become a static train   because it s not on its path     You can run the train formed by the original train plus the incorporated train from any cab  also in    a cab of the incorporated train   However before uncoupling  splitting  the trains  you have to  return to a cab of the original train     10 14 Signal related files  for content developers     OR manages signals as defined i
192. ncing    When the option is checked  in cases where multiple instances of the same object have to be  drawn  only a single draw call is sent to the GPU  This means lower CPU load  It is suggested to  always check this option     Page 18 of 206    This option will enable or disable display of the overhead wire     When this option is selected  the OR update rate cannot be higher than the monitor vertical sync  frequency  typically 60 Hz   This reduces CPU energy consumption in fast PCs     OR manages not only cab interiors using 2D images in a MSTS compatible way  but also supports  3D models  Most 2D cab images follow MSTS practice  being 1024 x 768 pixels to suit monitors  with a 4 3 aspect ratio     So  the problem arises   how to display these 4 3 cabs on a 16 9 or 16 10 monitor     One possibility is to stretch these images horizontally to match other aspect ratios  as shown in the  image below           To respect the proportions however  by default OR does no stretching and shows the full width of  the cab interior  thus losing a portion from the top and bottom of the image  You can use the Up  and Down Arrow keys to pan and reveal these missing portions     Therefore the setting for   Cab 2D Stretch has a default value of 0 providing no stretching and a  maximum value of 100 which stretches the picture so as to cover the complete display   Intermediate values provide a blend of panning and stretching     Page 19 of 206       This option defines the maximum distance at 
193. ndamental information  The other pages go into more detail  and are  used mainly for debugging or to get deeper information on how OR behaves  They are listed in the     Analysis tools    subchapter     The following information is displayed in the basic display   e Version   The version of the Open Rails software you are running  e Time   Game time of the Activity  e Speed   the speed in Miles Hr  or Kilometers Hr   e Gradient   Route gradient in   in that point  e Direction   Position of the Reverser   Electric  Diesel and Steam     e Throttle   Displays the current position of the throttle  expressed as a percentage of  full throttle  Throttle correctly uses Notches and configured   of power for Diesel  engines or   of throttle for steam engines     e Train Brake   Shows the current position of the train brake system and the pressure  value of the train brakes  Braking correctly reflects the braking system used   hold release  self  lapping or graduated release  The Train brake HUD line has two  Brake Reservoir pressure numbers  the first is the Equalization Reservoir  EQ  and  the second is the Brake Cylinder  BC  pressure  The two BP numbers report the brake  pressure in the lead engine and in the last car of the train  The unit of measure used  for brake pressure is defined by the option    Pressure unit        e Engine Brake   percentage of independent engine brake  Not fully releasing the  engine brake will affect train brake pressures     e Dynamic brake   if engaged
194. nds  or let the system work out the passing locations using the passing paths     11 5 6 4 Wait Commands and Permissive Signals    The  wait  and  follow  commands are processed through the  blockstate  of the signal control    If at the location where the train is to wait permissive signals are used  and these signals allow a     proceed    aspect on blockstate JN OBSTRUCTED  the    wait    or    follow    command will not work as  the train will not be stopped     11 5 6 5 Running Trains Around Midnight     A timetable can be defined for a full 24 hour day  and so would include trains running around  midnight     The following rules apply for the player train      e Train booked to start before midnight will be started at the end of the day  but will  continue to run if terminating after midnight     e Trains formed out of other trains starting before midnight will NOT be started if the  incoming train is delayed and as a result the start time is moved after midnight   In this situation  the activity is aborted     e Trains booked to start after midnight will instead be started at the beginning of the  day     The following rules apply for Al trains      e Trains booked to start before midnight will be started at the end of the day  but will  continue to run if terminating after midnight     e Trains formed out of other trains starting before midnight will still be started if the  incoming train is delayed and as a result the start time is moved after midnight     e Trains 
195. ning their relative pulling  ability  a theoretical approximate value of tractive effort is calculated using the boiler gauge  pressure and includes a factor to reduce the value of M E P     Thus our formula from above becomes  TE   Cyl 2 x  0 85 x BP x d2xs  D  Where   BP   Boiler Pressure  gauge pressure   psi     0 85     factor to account for losses in the engine  typically values between 0 7 and 0 85 were  used by different manufacturers and railway companies     Factor of Adhesion    The factor of adhesion describes the likelihood of the locomotive slipping when force is applied to  the wheels and rails  and is the ratio of the starting Tractive Effort to the weight on the driving  wheels of the locomotive     FoA   Wd  TE  Where   FoA   Factor of Adhesion  TE   Tractive Effort  lbs   Wd   Weight on Driving Wheels  Ibs     Typically the Factor of Adhesion should ideally be between 4 0  amp  5 0 for steam locomotives   Values below this range will typically result in slippage on the rail     Indicated HorsePower  IHP   Indicated Horsepower is the theoretical power produced by a steam locomotive   The generally accepted formula for Indicated Horsepower is  I H P    Cyl 2 x  M E P  x L x A x N    33000   Where    IHP   Indicated Horsepower  hp    Cyl   number of cylinders   M E P    mean effective pressure of cylinder  psi    L   stroke of cylinder piston  ft    A   area of cylinder  sq in     N   number of cylinder piston strokes per min  NB  two piston strokes for every 
196. nly   Friction  Davis A     journal Asper icaspere    or roller bearing   f ORTSDavis_A   502 8N    RTSD A WA N  Ibf FCal N    ORTSDAVIS AER    mechanical ae use Peace to ew ORTSDavis_A   502 8lb    sgt calculate  friction    As per loco specs  z  F Davis A     flange ORTSDavis_B   1 5465Nm s    ORTSDavis  B  x  WAG friction Nm s  Ibf mph P Mew ORTSDavis_B   1 5465Ibf mph                              Page 92 of 206       As per loco specs                                  Davis A     air Nm s42  ORTSDavis_C  1 43Nm s   2    ORTADAN EAk  WAG resistance friction Ibf mph 2 ase rea Men ORTSDavis_C   1 43lbf mph   2    calculate  Roller  Friction Roller     defaults ORTSBearingType   Roller    ORTSBearingType   x   WAG Bearing type  ON i to friction New NB  leave out if not known  or a friction  bearing  bearing  Total weight on      ORTSDriveWheelWeight   x   ENG the locomotive Mass As per loco specs New SUPENA RIENE  aa    a NB  can be left out if not known  driving wheels  Curve Speed Limit  Determines the  fC  louise ani ORTSUnbalancedSuperElevation   3in    DaHcleney As per vehicle ORTSUnbalancedSuperElevation  ORTSUnbalancedSuperElevation   x   WAG  Unbalanced Distance p New p  SuperElevation  specs  0 075m   p   NB  can be left out if not known  applied to  carriage  ORTSTrackGauge  4ft 8 5in   ORTSTrackGauge  4 708ft     ORTSTrackGauge  1 435m    A  ORTSTrackGauge  x   WAG Track gauge Distance s per railway Rie                specs          NB  can be left out if not known 
197. nt  unit to accepts   accepts  Mass kg kg kg  t t metric tonne  1 000 kg   lb lb  t uk Imperial ton  2 240 Ib   t us US ton  2 000 Ib   Distance mm  cm cm  m m m  km  in in  in 2 in 2 half inch   historic unit for tyre  diameters  ft  mile  Area m 2         m 2      m 2   ft 2 ft 2    Ft 2      FtA2                                         diesel  Volume 1 fuel 1 litres   m 3      m 3   in 3     in 3    ft 3 other   ft 3      ft 3    e g  BoilerVolume   g uk Imperial gallons  g us US gallons  gal US gallons  gals gals US gallons                            Page 205 of 206                                                                                                       Measure Default   Applies OR MSTS Comment  unit to accepts   accepts  Time second s  m  h  Current amp a  amp  Voltage volt v  kv  Mass Rate of g h  Change  kg h  lb h lb h lb h  Speed m s other m s m s metres per second  km h  kph kph kilometres per hour  kmh kmh misspelling accepted by MSTS  mph dynamic mph mph miles per hour  brake  Frequency hz hz Hertz  rps revolutions per second  rpm  Force N n n Newton  kn kn  lbf Pounds force  lb  Power w w Watt  kw  hp horsepower  Stiffness n m n m n m Newtons per metre  Resistance n m s n m s n m s   Newtons per metre per second  ns m Newton seconds per metre  Angular n rad s n rad s  Resistance                Page 206 of 206                                                                Measure Default   Applies OR MSTS Comment  unit to accepts   accepts  air  Press
198. nt and how far away you are from others  You can also look  if you are acting as dispatcher  the server always is the dispatcher  or as client          QO      A player joined will have the same weather  time and season as the server  no matter what are the  original choices     The player train may join the world and find that it is inside another train  Don   t panic  you have  two minutes to move your train out before OR thinks you want to couple with that train     Al trains are added by the server and broadcast to all players  As a client  do not start an activity  with Al trains  moreover it is recommended that you start in Explore mode on the client     You can jump to see other trains in sequence by pressing Alt 9  OpenRails will cycle through all  trains active on the server with each key press  As some trains may be far away  OpenRails may  need a few seconds to load the surrounding scenery  Thus you may temporarily see a blank  screen  You can press F7 to see train names  You can press 9 to return to seeing your own train     Locations of trains from other players are sent over the Internet  Because Internet routings vary  moment to moment there may be some lag  and trains may jump a bit as OpenRails tries to  update the locations with information received     Page 173 of 206    You can couple decouple as usual  As coupling is controlled in the server  a player needs to drive  slowly so that the server will have accurate information of train positions  If two playe
199. o place limits on the power  of a locomotive depending upon the design factors used     8 4 1 3 Locomotive Types    During the course of their development  many different types of locomotives were developed   some of the more common categories are as follows     e Simple   simple locomotives had only a single expansion cycle in the cylinder    e Compound   locomotives had multiple steam expansion cycles and typically had a  high and low pressure cylinder     e Saturated   steam was heated to only just above the boiling point of water     e Superheated   steam was heated well above the boiling point of water  and therefore  was able to generate more work in the locomotive     e Geared   locomotives were geared to increase the tractive effort produced by the  locomotive  this however reduced the speed of operation of the locomotive     Superheated Locomotives    In the early 1900s  superheaters were fitted to some locomotives  As the name was implied a  superheater was designed to raise the steam temperature well above the normal saturated steam  temperature  This had a number of benefits for locomotive engineers in that it eliminated  condensation of the steam in the cylinder  thus reducing the amount of steam required to produce  the same amount of work in the cylinders  This resulted in reduced water and coal consumption in  the locomotive  and generally improved the efficiency of the locomotive     Superheating was achieved by installing a superheater element that effective
200. o report a Decided Bug on our Bug Tracker before a developer has  declared your Maybe Bug a real bug     19 5 Additional Notes  Please do not post feature requests as a Maybe Bug to the Bug Tracker on Launchpad     Please do not report the same bug multiple times  just because the first report did not get attention  within a short time  Sorting out the resulting confusion can slow things down even more     Please do not report Bugs directly to the Bug Tracker when you are not 100  sure it   s a real   significant bug  or have not been asked to do so     Don t be offended by bug statuses   they often sound harsher than they really mean  like  Invalid      Don t expect a speedy response in general   issues will get looked at as and when people have  the time     Be prepared to expand upon the initial report   it is remarkably easy to forget some crucial detail  that others need to find and fix your bug  so expect to be asked further questions before work can  begin    Try to avoid comments that add no technical or relevant detail   if you want to record that the bug  affects you  Launchpad has a dedicated button at the top   Does this bug affect you       If you wish to follow the progress of someone else s bug report and get e mail notifications  you  can subscribe to bug mail from the sidebar    19 6 Summary  Bug Report Checklists  19 6 1    Maybe Bug      e New topic in appropriate sub forum   e Topic Title   Open Rails V lt version gt  Bug   lt description gt     e Descript
201. ociated graphical representations of Open Rails are the property of openrails org  All other third  party brands  products  service names  trademarks  or registered service marks are the property of  and used to identify the products or services of their respective owners     1 3 Copyright Acknowledgment and License    2009 2015 openrails org This document is part of Open Rails     Open Rails is free software  you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU  General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation  either version 3 of the  License  or any later version     You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License as part of the Open Rails  distribution in Documentation Copying txt  If not  see http   www gnu org licenses      Page 1 of 206    2 New in This Release  Here are the features which have been added or substantially changed since v0 9 was released     Extremely high compatibility with MSTS content   Train operation accordingly to timetables in  csv format  entered with a specific editor  Support for languages other than English   Support of 3D cabs    Train physics far more realistic than in MSTS    Some experimental features have been added which you can turn on  some of them may affect  performance     Compatibility with MSTS environment files  Extended Al train shunting   Adhesion linked to weather   Support for DDS textures    Extended viewing distance    Page 2 of 206    3 Introduction    3 1 What is Open R
202. ock trap is actually sprung     If a passing location contains platforms and there are passenger trains which are booked to stop  there  OR will try to locate an alternate platform on the passing path  and if it can find it  this    Page 131 of 206    platform will replace the original one as the stop platform  This behavior occurs only if the  Location linked Passing Path Processing option has been checked     Selecting this type of passing path with the related experimental option processing can lead to  considerable changes in the behaviour of trains on single track routes   and behaviour that is  certainly significantly different from that in MSTS     10 12 Other Comparisons Between Running Activities in ORTS or MSTS  10 12 1 End of run of Al trains   Al trains end their run where the end point of their path resides  as in MSTS    10 12 2    Default Performance    and    Performance    Parameters   If the Al train does not make station stops  its maxspeed  not considering signal  soeedpost and  route speed  is given by the first MaxVelocity parameter in the  con file  expressed in meters per  second  multiplied by the  Default performance  parameter  divided by 100  that can be found and  modified in the MSTS AE in the  Service editor   Such parameter divided by 100 is written by the  AE in the  srv file as  Efficiency      If the Al train makes station stops  its maxspeed depends from the  Performance  parameter for  every route section  as can be seen and defined in the
203. ode as there are no Al trains when running in this  mode     If an alternative path is defined  using the Passing Path definition in MSTS Activity Editor   and the  train is setting a route to the start node of this alternative path  it will check if a deadlock is set for  the related end node  If so  and the alternative path is clear  it will take the alternative path   allowing the other train to use the main path  If the alternative path is already occupied  the train  will wait short of the node where the path starts  or the last signal in front  if any   this is to prevent  blocking both tracks which would leave the opposite train nowhere to go     Further rules for the use of alternative paths      e Trains from both direction must have the same main path through the area     Page 127 of 206    e  f only one train has an alternative path defined  and the trains are to pass  that train  will always use the alternative path  the other train will always use the main path  regardless of which train arrives first     e  f both trains have an alternative path defined  and the trains are to pass  the first train  to clear its route will take the alternative path  Note that this need not always be the  first train to arrive   it could be that the train which first clears its path takes much  longer to actually get to the passing loop     10 6 Reversal Points  If a reversal point is defined  the path will be extended beyond that point to the end of the section   this is to the n
204. ode containing the bug fix has been released in an official  release     19 8 Disclaimer  Having posted a bug report in a forum or in Launchpad does not generate any obligation or liability  or commitment for the OR development team to examine and fix the bug  The OR development  team decides whether it will examine and fix the bug on a completely voluntary and autonomous    basis     Page 198 of 206    20 Open Rails Software Platform    Inside view     20 1 Architecture    To better understand how the Open Rails game operates  performs  and functions  the architecture  diagram below lays out how the software code is organized  The architecture of the Open Rails  software allows for modular extension and development  while providing standardized methods to    customize the simulation experience      amp  Please note that this diagram includes many capabilities and functions that are yet    to be implemented     3D Viewer     scenery  track  terrain appearance   sky  water  sun  moon                Dispatch     time of day effects    weather   season effects Board   shadows  lights vi    forest regions AR     appearance of interactive objects    behaviour and appearance of animated objects   hazards ete   appearance of signals   behaviour and annearance of smoke    Simulation     Loco Viewers  Controls Cab Viewer    Camera Controls       Player Simulator Engine    Controls i Simulation State    Ihe modules torAl   and Signals can be   replaced on a    per TE Signals    route  
205. on English keyboards  just after your train is coupled or uncoupled  or when  you just gain back the control of your own train     9  Use Shift E to gain control of your own train after uncoupling     10  Use other communication tools  such as Ventrillo or Skype  to communicate with other  players     11  Always completely stop before uncoupling trains with two players coupled together  12 9 Possible Problems    e A server may not be able to listen on the port specified  Restart the server and choose  another port     e  f you cannot connect to the server  verify sure you have the correct IP address and  port number  and that the server has the port opened     e  f other player have rolling stock you do not have  that train will automatically replace  cars from your own folder  and this replacement may make the consist    interesting        e You may join the game and see you ve selected the same start point as someone else  and that your train is inside another train  Move the trains apart within two minutes  and it will be fine     e  f your train is moving too quickly when trying to couple  the process may not work and  weird things can happen     e As the server has absolute control  clients may notice the switch just changed will be  changed back a few seconds later if the server controlled train wants to pass it     e Coupling uncoupling the same set of trains may end up with weird things     e Ctrl E locomotive switch may have train cars flipped     Page 176 of 206    
206. on is within the platform boundaries is different for player trains and Al  trains  For player trains an individual check is made on every passenger wagon to check if it is  within the plaform boundaries  it is assumed that this is OK if at least two thirds of the wagon are  within   For Al trains instead the number of wagons engines within the platform is computed  and  all of them  up to the number of the passenger wagons in the consist  are considered as    Page 132 of 206    passenger wagons  The player or Al train boarding time is added to the real arrival time  giving a  new departure time  this new departure time is compared with the scheduled departure time and  the higher value is selected as the real departure time     Al freight trains stop for 20 seconds at stations   A train is considered to be a passenger train if at least one wagon  or engine  carries passengers     Al real freight trains  0 passenger cars  stop 20 seconds at stations as in MSTS if scheduled  starting times are not present  If they are present the freight trains will stop up to the scheduled  starting time or up to the real arrival time plus 20 seconds  whichever is higher     A special behaviour has been introduced for trains with more than 10 cars and having a single  passenger car  This type of train has been used in MSTS to have the possibility of also defining  schedules for freight trains  These trains are managed   like MSTS   as passenger trains with the  rules defined above  However a 
207. on must be deleted manually  otherwise the program will  still use this older version    If a route is edited  such that the  tdb might have been changed  all binary paths must be  deleted      Consist row  The  consist row defines the consist used for that train  This field is compulsory     However  if the train is run as an Al train and it is  formed  out of another train  see below   the  consist information is ignored and the train uses the consist of the train out of which it was  formed     For the player train  the consist is always used even if the train is formed out of another train   The consist definition must be a   con file as defined by the MSTS Activity Editor  and must  be stored in the defined consist directory    Also a more complex syntax of the consist definition is possible  as described below     This allows a consist definition to be not just a single string directly referring to a file  but a  combination of strings  with the possibility to use  part of  the consist in reverse     The general syntax is    consist   reverse     consists   reverse               Example   a loco hauled train  using the same set of coaches  running in both directions   Two consists are defined   c_loco and c_wagons     The consist definitions which can now be used are    c_loco   c_wagons   and for reverse   c_loco  reverse   c_wagons  reverse    Please note that  reverse always applies only to the sub consist with which it is defined   not for the complete combined cons
208. or is similar in function to MSTS  It records the required    Arrival    time of your train  and the actual arrival time as well as the required    Depart    time and the actual departure time     A text message alerts the engineer as to the proper departure time along with a whistle or other  departure sound     Next Station  Binario 2 10 08 25  Distance Arrive Actual Depart Actual    09 59 00 09 59 00 10 02 00  2 5 km 10 07 00 10 12 00       7 4 13 Odometer   The odometer display appears in the centre of the main window  toggled on or off by the keys  Shift Z  The direction of the count is toggled by the keys Shift Ctrl Z  and the odometer is reset  or initialized by Ctrl Z     When set for counting down  it initializes to the total length of the train  As the train moves  the  odometer counts down  reaching zero when the train has moved its length  When set for counting  up  it resets to zero  and measures the train   s total movement     For example  if the odometer is set for counting down and you click Ctrl Z as the front of the train  passes a location  then when it reaches zero you will know  without switching views  that the other  end of the train has just reached the same point  e g  the entrance to a siding  etc     Page 46 of 206    7 5 Dispatcher Window  The dispatcher window is a very useful tool to monitor and control train operation  The Dispatcher  window option must be selected     The dispatcher window is actually created by pressing Cirl 9  The window is 
209. or the runtime  they  can run on any platform that supports the XNA Framework with minimal or no modification of the  Game engine     A A license fee is payable to Microsoft to use XNA Game Studio for Xbox 360 games  At  this time  the Open Rails team has not investigated whether the Open Rails software is  suitable for Xbox     20 3 Frames per Second  FPS  Performance  For the current release  the Open Rails development team has untethered the FPS rate from the  sync rate of the monitor  This allows the development team to more easily document performance  improvements  The Open Rails team at a later date may decide to limit FPS to the sync rate of the  monitor     20 4 Game Clock and Internal Clock  Like other simulation software  Open Rails software uses two internal    clocks     a game clock and  an internal clock  The game clock is required to synchronize the movement of trains  signal status   and present the correct game environment  The internal clock is used synchronize the software  process for optimal efficiency and correct display of the game environment     The Open Rails team is dedicated to ensuring the game clock properly manages time in the  simulation  so that a train will cover the proper distance in the correct time  The development team  considers this vital aspect for an accurate simulation by ensuring activities run consistently across  community members    computer systems     20 5 Resource Utilization  Because Open Rails software is designed for Micr
210. ore  the description for train cars physics is  also valid for locomotives  because a locomotive is a special case of a train car   All parameters  are defined within the  wag or  eng file  The definition is based on MSTS file format and some  additional ORTS based parameters  To avoid possible conflicts in MSTS  the    ORTS    prefix is  added to every OpenRails specific parameter  such as ORTSMaxTractiveForceCurves      The  wag or  eng file may be placed as in MSTS in the TRAINS TRAINSET TrainCan folder   where TrainCar is the name of the train car folder   If OR specific parameters are used  or if  different  wag or  eng files are used for MSTS and OR  the preferred solution is to place the OR   specific  wag or  eng file in a created folder TRAINS TRAINSET  TrainCanOpenRails   see here for  more      8 1 Train Cars  WAG  or    Wagon    Part of ENG file   The behavior of a train car is mainly defined by a resistance   resistive force  a force needed to  pull a car   Train car physics also includes coupler slack and braking  In the description below  the  Wagon section of the WAG   ENG file is discussed     8 1 1 Resistive Forces   Open Rails physics calculates resistance based on real world physics  gravity  mass  rolling  resistance and optionally curve resistance  This is calculated individually for each car in the train   The program calculates rolling resistance  or friction  based on the Friction parameters in the  Wagon section of  wag  eng file  Open Rails identifi
211. ose    Main Route    or    Side Route    to  switch  They can also click on a signal  green  red or orange dot  and choose to change the light     The Dispatcher can choose a player and give the player right to throw switches and change  signals  by clicking the button    Assist     The right can be revoked by click the    Normal    button     The Dispatcher can choose a player from the avatar list and remove that player from the game     You can send a text message by typing in the top left text input area  and view the most recent 10  messages from the viewing area  One can send message to all after finishing it  or select some  avatars and send a message to those selected     Page 175 of 206    12 8 Summary of Multi Player Procedures  1  Server can start an activity or Explore  Clients must choose to Explore the route or start with  an activity without Al trains     2  Missing rolling stock in other players    consists will be automatically replaced by existing cars  from local directory     3  You have two minutes after joining the game to move your train out of other trains     4  Use Alt 9 to see other trains  9 to see your own train  Ctrl 9 to view hide the dispatcher  window  Use the mouse wheel to zoom and left mouse button to pan the dispatcher window     5  We can send and read messages from the dispatcher window  6  Use Ctrl Alt F11 to see the path trains will follow  and F7 to see train names  7  Move trains slowly when trying to couple     8  Use   and Shift    
212. osofts XNA game framework  it natively exploits  today   s graphics cards    ability to offload much of the display rendering workload from the  computer   s CPU     20 6 Multi  Threaded Coding  The Open Rails software is designed from the ground up to support up to 4 CPUs  either as virtual  or physical units  Instead of a single thread looping and updating all the elements of the simulation   the software uses four threads for the main functions of the software     Thread 1   Main Render Loop  RenderProcess   Thread 2   Physics and Animation  UpdaterProcess   Thread 3   Shape and Texture Loading Unloading  LoaderProcess     Thread 4     Sound  There are other threads used by the multiplayer code as each opened communication is handled    Page 200 of 206    by a thread     The RenderProcess runs in the main game thread  During its initialization  it starts two subsidiary  threads  one of which runs the UpdaterProcess and the other the LoaderProcess  It is important  that the UpdaterProcess stays a frame ahead of RenderProcess  preparing any updates to  camera  sky  terrain  trains  etc  required before the scene can be properly rendered  If there are  not sufficient compute resources for the UpdaterProcess to prepare the next frame for the  RenderProcess  the software reduces the frame rate until it can    catch up        Initial testing indicates that    stutters       are significantly reduced because the process   LoaderProcess  associated with loading shapes and textures
213. otive  it is suggested that the following  settings be considered for selection in the Open Rails options menu     e Break couplers   e Curve speed dependent   e Curve resistance speed   e Hot start   e Tunnel resistance dependent  NB  Refer to the relevant sections of the manual for more detailed description of these functions   Locomotive Starting    Open the cylinder cocks  They are to remain open until the engine has traversed a distance of  about an average train length  consistent with safety     The locomotive should always be started in full gear  reverser up as high as possible   according  to the direction of travel  and kept there for the first few turns of the driving wheels  before  adjusting the reverser     Page 87 of 206    After ensuring that all brakes are released  open the regulator sufficiently to move the train  care  should be exercised to prevent slipping  do not open the regulator too much before the locomotive  has gathered speed  Severe slipping causes excessive wear and tear on the locomotive   disturbance of the fire bed and blanketing of the spark arrestor  If slipping does occur  the  regulator should be closed as appropriate  and if necessary sand applied     Also  when starting  a slow even increase of power will allow the couplers all along the train to be  gradually extended  and therefore reduce the risk of coupler breakages     Locomotive Running    Theoretically  when running  the regulator should always be fully open and the speed of the
214. p development is shown on  the pictures below  The    Wheel slip    value is displayed as a value relative to the best adhesion  conditions for actual speed and weather  The value of 63  means very good force transition  For  values higher than    Wagon   ORTSadhesion   ORTSSlipWarningThreshold        or 70  by default   the    Wheel slip warning    is displayed  but the force transition is still very good  This indication  should warn you to use the throttle very carefully  Exceeding 100   the    Wheel slip    message is  displayed and the wheels are starting to speed up  which can be seen on the speedometer or in  external view 2  To reduce the wheel slip  use    throttle down     sanding or the locomotive brake     FORCE INFORMATION    Wheel slip  Axle drive force    Axle brake force  Step dividing ac    Solver   Stability correctidn    Axle out force    63    1  5   185948 N   ON   desteps frame   RungeKutta4    164784 N  1269 kW     Wheel slip warming    BORAN KORATO   Wheel slip  519  Axle drive force   Axle brake forceO   Step dividing aci i2 steps frame   Solver RungeKutta4  Stability correctidn   Axle out force     177617 N  1576 kW     0 5        Page 72 of 206    Wheel slip    FORCE INFORMATION  Wheel slip 59  Axle drive force 18458  Axle brake force   p dividing aci    Stability correctidn  Axle out force 152464 N  3646 kW     The    actual maximum    of the tractive force is based on the Curtius Kniffler adhesion theory and  can be adjusted by a following paramet
215. path  the starting time  the season and the weather with the relevant buttons     To select the consist you have two possibilities  either you click under    Consist      and the whole list  of available consists will appear  or you first click under    Locomotive      where you can select the  desired locomotive  and then click under    Consist      where only the consists led by that locomotive  will appear     If you instead select a specific activity  you won t have to perform any further selections     If you have selected the related Experimental Option  at runtime you can switch Autopilot mode on  or off  which allows you to watch OR driving your train  as if you were a trainspotter or a visitor in  the cab     Page 10 of 206    5 4 2 Timetable Mode  If you select the radio button    Timetable     the main menu window will change as follows     ix  Installation profile  What s new  Update to X2901   E  GTA TIR Mactier be   Route  Greater Toronto Area V1 5  Route  Canadian National  Greater Toronto Area V1 5   Greater Toronto Area V1 5     Subdivisions indude   Mode  Union Station Rail Corridor  USRC   4 miles      C Activity     Timetable Timetable  Timetable set  Georgetown GO Create   Georgetown GO Create Player Timetable  Georgetown GO Create  Timetable   Georgetown GO Create hd   Player Train  Train  206       Selected train  206  Start time  6 35  create 6 00  ahead 208  Consist    GOTransitWestR  Season  Summer    Locomotive  F59PH GO 523  The EMD F59PH Passenger
216. pect is active  the speed limit will  not be changed  This can  for instance  be used if a route linked speed limit is required  This  aspect can then be set for a route for which no speed limit is required     An aspect can also be set to not have an active speed limit but with a special signal flag    OR_SPEEDRESET     If this flag is set  the speed limit will be reset to the limit as set by the last speed limit sign  This can  be used to reset any limit imposed by a specific signal aspect  Note that this does not overrule any  speed limits set by another SPEED signal as those limits are processed as if set by a speed limit  sign     Example      SignalType   SpeedSignal   SignalFnType   SPEED    SignalLightTex    litex     SignalDrawStates  5   SignalDrawState   0   speed25            SignalDrawState   1   speed40            SignalDrawState   2   speed50           SignalDrawState   3     speed60        Page 139 of 206    SignalDrawState   4   speed70               SignalAspects   5    SignalAspect  APPROACH_1  speed25  SpeedMPH   25      SignalAspect  APPROACH_2  speed40  SpeedMPH   40      SignalAspect  APPROACH_3  speed50  SpeedMPH   50      SignalAspect  CLEAR_1  speed60  SpeedMPH   60      SignalAspect  CLEAR_2  speed70  SpeedMPH   70           SignalNumClearAhead   2      Notes      e The SignalNumClearAhead value must be included to satisfy syntax but has no  function     e The actual speed can be set either using fixed aspect selection through user  functions  or ca
217. pen  Rails Source Trunk Documentation folder     When    System    is selected  OR automatically selects the language of the hosting Windows  if the  language is available     6 1 9 Pressure unit  The player can select the unit of measure of brake pressure in the HUD display  see here for HUD  information      When set to    automatic    the unit of measure is the same as that used in the cabview of the  locomotive     6 1 10 Other units  This selects the units displayed for length  mass  pressure  etc  in the F5 HUD of the simulation     The option    Player   s Location    sets the units according to the Windows    Language and Region     settings on the player   s computer     The option    Route    set the units based on the data in the route files  The other options are self   explanatory     The F5 HUD uses the abbreviations    stn    for short tons  2000 Ib   and    t    or    tn    for metric tons   tonnes      Note that the units displayed by the F4 Track Monitor  e g  velocity and distance  are always  based on data read from the route files     Page 16 of 206    6 2 Audio Options    options jj x       General Audio   video   simulation   Keyboard   Data logger   Evaluation   Content   Updater   Experimental    JV MSTS Bin compatible sound    10  lt i   sound volume      5 Ea Sound detail level       Except for very slow computers  it is suggested that you leave the    MSTS Bin compatible sound     option checked and set the Sound detail level to 5     The      soun
218. pilot mode to player driven mode     The jerky movements of the levers in autopilot mode are the result of the way that OR pilots the  train     7 8 Changing the View  Open Rails provides all of the MSTS views plus additional view options     e A 3D interior cabview option  where a 3D cabview file is available    e Control of the view direction using the mouse  with the right hand button pressed      e The exterior views  keys 2 3 4 6  and the interior view  key 5  can now be attached to  any train in the simulation by the new Ctrl 9 key operation     All of the required key presses are shown by the    F1 Help    key in the game  Note that some of the  key combinations are different in Open Rails than in MSTS  For instance  in Open Rails the cab     Headout    views from the cab view are selected by the    Home    and    End    keys  and the view  direction is manipulated by the four arrow keys  or the mouse with the right hand button  depressed     The commands for each of the views are described below     e Key 1 opens the 2D driver   s view from the interior of the controlling cab of the player  locomotive  The entire cab view can be moved to other cabs  if available  in the player  train by successive presses of Ctrl E  the train must be stopped and the direction  switch in Neutral  The view can be changed to the fixed left  front  or right view by  clicking the left  up or right arrow keys   The 2D view is constructed from three 2D  images  so the actual camera position 
219. position in the sky  This provides  an extremely realistic representation of the time of day selected for the activity  For example  12  noon in the winter will have a lower sun position in the northern hemisphere than 12 noon in the  summer  Open Rails game environment will accurately represent these differences     Once the activity is started  Open Rails software allows the player to advance or reverse the  environment    time of day    independently of the movement of trains  Thus  the player train may sit  stationary while the time of day is moved ahead or backward  The keys to command this depend  from the national settings of the keyboard  and can be derived from the key assignment list  obtained pressing F1     In addition  Open Rails offers functionality similar to the time acceleration switch for MSTS   Use Alt   Page Up or Alt   Page Down keys to change the speed of the game clock     Page 53 of 206    In a multiplayer session  all clients    time  weather and season selections are overridden by those  set by the server     7 10 2 Weather   When in activity mode Open Rails software determines the type of weather to display from the  Weather parameter in the MSTS Activity file  In the other modes the weather can be selected in  the start menu     7 10 3 Modifying Weather at Runtime  He following commands are available at runtime  keys not shown here can be found in the key  assignment list obtained pressing F1      e Overcast increase decrease  increases and decreas
220. pproaching the signal  in meters   speed   required speed  in meters sec    Note that the speed is checked only when the train is within the defined distance     Important note   although the script uses    float    to define local variables  these are in fact all  integers  This is also true for the values used in these functions   if direct values are used  these  must be integer values     The values may be set directly in the signal script  either as variables or as numbers in the  function call     However  it is also possible to define the required limits in the sigcfg dat file as part of the signal  definition     The syntax definition for this is    ApproachControlLimits    lt definitions gt     Allowed definitions    e Position    e Positionm   position in meters   e Positionkm   position in kilometers   e Positionmiles   position in miles   e Positionyd   position in yards   e Speed   e Speedkph   speed in km   hour   e Speedmph   speed in miles   hour   These values are referenced in the script file using the following variable names    e Approach_Control_Req_Position  e Approach_Control_Req_Speed  These variables must not be defined as floats etc   but can be used directly without prior definition     Note that the values as defined in the sigcfg dat file will be converted to meters and meters sec  and rounded to the nearest integer value     Page 141 of 206    Example    This example is for a three head search light signal  which uses Approach Control if the rout
221. psi   series  indicated  of x  amp  y values   horsepower  increases       Notes     Existing     means a parameter in original MSTS or added through MSTS BIN  New     means added as part of OR development    Possible Locomotive Reference Info     Page 95 of 206       i  Steam Locomotive Data   http   orion math iastate edu jdhsmith term slindex htm  ii  Example Wiki Locomotive Data   http   en wikipedia org wiki SR_ Merchant Navy class  Testing Resources for Open Rails Steam Locomotives     http   coalstonewcastle com au physics     Page 96 of 206    8 5 Engines     Multiple Units in Same Consist or Al Engines  In an OR player train one locomotive is controlled by the player  while the other units are  controlled by default by the train s MU  multiple unit  signals for braking and throttle position  etc   The player controlled locomotive generates the MU signals which are passed along to every unit  in the train  For Al trains  the Al software directly generates the MU signals  i e  there is no player   controlled locomotive  In this way  all engines use the same physics code for power and friction     ig This software model will ensure that non player controlled engines will behave exactly the  same way as player controlled ones     8 6 Open Rails Braking  Open Rails software has implemented its own braking physics in the current release  It is based on  the Westinghouse 26C and 26F air brake and controller system  Open Rails braking will parse the  type of braking from the
222. r at Launchpad in order  to be able to report a bug     Once that is done  follow the steps the software takes you through  In  Summary  copy and paste  the quick description of the bug you also entered as a forum thread name for the Maybe Bug  report     Next  look through the list of topics Launchpad thinks your bug may be related to   maybe your  issue has already been reported     If you cannot relate to any of the suggested bugs  click the  No    need a new bug report  button  and continue     In the  Further Information  field  enter the same info you also gave in the Maybe Bug report  copy  and paste   Screenshots may need to be added as attachments  and you will also need to re   upload the OpenRailsLog txt file  Do not forget to include all info you added in additional posts to  the original Maybe Bug report  and also add a link to the latter at the bottom of the  Further  Information    field     Once your bug has been submitted  keep adding further information only in additional posts  in  order to avoid the risk of developers missing the additional info     The above description is available in a condensed  checklist  form below     Important  Do not say  All information is included in the linked thread  as skimming through a    Page 196 of 206    thread for the crucial bit of information is a really annoying task  Instead  please provide a concise   but complete summary of the Maybe Bug thread in the  Further Information  field     Important  Please do not rush t
223. r trains  couple together  one of them will become a helper  and a message will be shown on the left  indicating that the player is in Helper mode  A player in Helper mode cannot control their consist  as it falls under control of the lead locomotive  By pressing Shift E you can swap Helper status  with another player on the train  Always press   and Shift   to reset brakes each time after  coupling uncoupling     Players can uncouple their own trains  Players in the uncoupled trains may need to press Shift E  to gain control  otherwise  the uncoupled trains may become a loose consist  Always stop  completely before uncoupling  otherwise weird things may happen  Players may also need to  press keys for resetting brake state after uncoupling  see here         Players can throw switches by pressing G or Shift G   and the switch state will change for all  players on the server  The server has a choice to disallow clients to throw switches manually     Both switches and signals are synchronized through the server  default every 10 seconds      Player actions  such as sounding the horn or bell  turning on or off headlights  moving the  pantograph up and down  opening and closing doors  moving the mirrors are broadcast to other  players  Currently only the player controlled train has the cone of light shown     A separate Dispatcher Window  also shown below  showing the route  signals and trains can be  activated by pressing Ctrl 9  By default  it is minimized and you must click on
224. rain too far ahead  will immediately have  an effect on the running of a timetable     If signals clear too far ahead on a single track line  for instance  it means trains will clear through  passing loops too early  which leads to very long waits for trains in the opposite direction  This  in  turn  can lead to lock ups as multiple trains start to converge on a single set of passing loops     Similar situations can occur at large  busy stations   if trains clear their path through such a station  too early  it will lead to other trains being kept waiting to enter or exit the station    If    forms    or  triggers  commands are used to link reversing trains  the problem is exacerbated as  any delays for the incoming train will work through on the return working     11 5 6 2 Call On Signal Aspect    Signalling systems may allow a train to    call on     i e  allow a train onto a section of track already  occupied by another train  also known as permissive working      Page 167 of 206    The difference between  call on  and    permissive signals     STOP and PROCEED aspects  is that  the latter is also allowed if the train in the section is moving  in the same direction   but    call on     generally is only allowed if the train in the section is at a standstill     When a signal allows    call on     Al trains will always pass this signal and run up to a pre defined  distance behind the train in the section     In station areas  this can lead to real chaos as trains may run in
225. re actually  used are required  but many third party trainsets refer to original MSTS files like cabviews  and  in particular  sound files  Many consists refer to engines or wagons from the original  MSTS routes but those can be easily replaced with other engines or wagons     e SOUND root folder     Only very few routes provide a full new sound set  so the original files included in this folder  are usually needed     Page 8 of 206    5 Getting Started  After having successfully installed Open Rails  see the Installation Manual   to run the game you  must double click on the Open Rails icon on the desktop  or on the OpenRails exe file     The OpenRails main window will appear  This displays your available MSTS installations        Hix  Installation profile  What s new  Update to X2901     Default a 7  Route  Marias Pass  Route  Location  Montana  USA   Marias Pass w   Route length  163 miles  270 km   Mode  Railroad  The Burlington Northern and Santa Fe Railway Company  BNSF        Activity C Timetable Locomotive  Dash 9  Activity  The GE 9 44CW  commonly called  the Dash 9    a modern diesel electric locomotive  most effective pulling  loads over long stretches at moderate speeds      Explore Route   mz    Locomotive type  Diesel Electric  Locomotive  ae   Dash 9      Consist   2 Dash 9  30 mixed bad  Starting at   Bison Y  Heading to   Grizzly         Time  fiz00   Duration     Season   Summer    Difficulty       Weather   Clear    m Singleplayer Multiplayer  an Options   
226. reen  One could  of course  use two different states for yellow at C  but that soon gets rather  complicated  and also one might soon run out of available aspects     With the new function  it becomes simpler   if B is at yellow  A can directly check the state of C   and so decide if it can clear to green or must show yellow     Suppose state SIGASP_STOP shows red  SIGASP_APPROACH_1 shows yellow and  SIGASP_CLEAR_1 shows green for all signals  the related part of the script could be as follows   if  next_sig_Ir SIGFN_NORMAL     SIGASP_APPROACH_1     if  next_nsig_Ir SIGFN_NORMAL  2     SIGASP_STOP     state   SIGASP_APPROACH_1     else       state   SIGASP_CLEAR_1           The function is also very useful when a distant signal is to reflect the state of more than one home  signal  but dist_multi_sig_mr cannot be used because there is no distant signal further on     10 15 8 Signalling Function HASHEAD  This function can be used for any optional SIGNAL_HEAD as defined for the relevant signalshape  in sigcfg dat  to check if that has been selected for this signal or not     Using  DECOR  dummy heads  this allows these heads to be used as additional user settings  and  as such are kind of an extension to the four available SIGFEAT_USER flags     Please note that this function is still experimental   Function call   state   HASHEAD headname      Function returns 1 if head is set  else 0     Page 148 of 206    10 16 OR Specific Additions to Activity Files  The additions described
227. release utilizes a peer to peer mode  thus each player must start and run OR on their  computer  A special server was deployed so you may not need to set up a server from your own  computer     12 2 Getting Started  One player starts as the server  and then the others connect as clients  Each player will choose  and operate their own consist  and locomotive   but also can jump to watch others    consists  or  couple with others to work as lead and DPU through a tough route  or even act as a dispatcher to  control signals and switches manually     12 3 Requirements  The server can start an activity or choose to explore  Clients MUST choose to explore  or a  simple activity with timetable but no Al trains    The client must select the same route played by the server     It is not required for everyone to have the same set of paths  rolling stocks and consists     12 4 Technical Issues  If you start the server at home  it will be necessary for you to learn your public IP address  You  may also need to configure your router for port forwarding  Details to accomplish these are given  in sections that follow     It is recommended that you do not run a server for a prolonged period as the code has not been  tightened for security  Only tell people you trust that you have a server started     12 5 Technical Support  You can ask questions in the following forums  trainsim com  elvastower com  uktrainsim com   etc     A web forum has been set for you to post questions and announce serv
228. reset the adhesion model  If you  experience such behavior most of time  use the basic adhesion model instead by pressing     DebugToggleAdvancedAdhesion         Ctri Alt X    keys by default      Another option is to use a Moving average filter available in the Simulation Options  The higher the  value  the more stable the simulation will be  However  the higher value causes slower dynamic  response  The recommended range is between 10 and 50     To match some of the real world features  the    Wheel slip    event can cause automatic zero throttle  setting  Use the    Engine  ORTS  ORTSWheelSlipCausesThrottleDown      Boolean value of the  ENG file     Page 73 of 206    8 2 Engine     Classes of Motive Power  Open Rails software provides for different classes of engines  diesel  electric  steam and default  If  needed  additional classes can be created with unique performance characteristics     8 2 1 Diesel Locomotives in General   The diesel locomotive model in ORTS simulates the behavior of two basic types of diesel engine  driven locomotives    diesel electric and diesel mechanical  The diesel engine model is the same  for both types  but acts differently because of the different type of load  Basic controls  direction   throttle  dynamic brake  air brakes  are common across all classes of engines  Diesel engines can  be started or stopped by pressing the START STOP key  Y in English keyboards   The starting  and stopping sequence is driven by a    starter    logic  whic
229. routes where this effect has already been  natively introduced  for these  this option is not recommended    6 10 8 Extended Al train shunting   When this option is selected  further Al train shunting functions are available  This allows for more    interesting and varied activities  If an activity is run which makes use of these function  this option  must be selected  This option has no effect in Timetable mode     The following additional shunting functions are available   e Al train couples to static consist and restarts with it     e Al train couples to player or Al train and becomes part of it  coupled Al train continues  on its path     e Al train couples to player or Al train and leaves to it its cars  coupled and coupling  train continue on their path     e Al train couples to player or Al train and    steals    its cars  coupled and coupling train  continue on their path     Page 31 of 206    e Al train uncouples any number of its cars  the uncoupled part becomes a static  consist  With the same function it is possible to couple any number of cars from a  static consist     for content developers  A more detailed description of this feature can be found under Extended Al  Train Shunting under Open Rails Train Operation     for content developers  Selecting this option also enables the waiting points to declare an absolute    time of day instead of a waiting point duration  A more detailed description of this feature can be  found in the related paragraph in the chap
230. rrrnrrnnnneet 178  14 Open Rails Sound Management            ssssssnnneneeeeseenrrrrrrrsstrtttrrrntttstttttttnntteserttnerrnnenssennenn eee  182  15 Oper Rails 721 9  arene naan re eee ene aaaea ee ee AEEA ENAA Aa EE eee 186  16 OR specific Route Features xiascccrcccierniciesctetenretertiacens wienertheneieiaratiehnrermereanamienesereeerecetioacenares 191  17 Developing OR Content eens ae eete renee eeer Tome aera area meee meter eon rea eee ete ee ee 192  18 In Case Of Malfunction civiatsran see Sacauzccceainen accotexatecaaven siaeoutctdeceerassdesuta tocerveadadeneatdaeven nnne Ennn nenet 195  19 Open Rails Software Platform   0 0 0 0       cceeecceccee eee eeeeeeeenaeeeeee eee eeeeaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeneeaaaaes 199  20 Plans and ROddMapiccciieonicnehnmihinnminnsinnmumh Rae 202  21 Acknowledgements ae ae eee re eee eae ee eee ee EEE EEE EEEn 203  22 APPEndiCe Senna eee ae eee ee ee ee ee oe a ee er ree eee ae 205    1 Cover picture by Max Brisben    1 Legal    1 1 Warranty  NO WARRANTIES  openrails org disclaims any warranty  at all  for its Software  The Open Rails  software and any related tools  or documentation is provided    as is    without warranty of any kind   either express or implied  including suitability for use  You  as the user of this software   acknowledge the entire risk from its use  See the license for more details     1 2 Properties Acknowledgment  Open Rails  Open Rails Transport Simulator  ORTS  openrails org  Open Rails symbol and  ass
231. running train will be shown inclined  towards the internal part of the curve     2  When the cab view is selected  the cab itself will be shown as inclined towards the internal part  of the curve  while the external world will be shown as inclined towards the external part  the  ratio of these two inclinations can be changed at runtime by repeatedly pressing Alt R  Four  possible ratios are possible     Page 29 of 206    Pause Menu    Quit Open s  Alt   F4        Pause Menu    Quit Open Rails  Alt   F4   Save your game  F2     Continue playing  Escape       mnane    ji 3  f  f        i  K  9      i   a       OR implements super elevated tracks using Dynamic Tracks  You can change the appearance of  tracks by creating a TrProfile sft in the TrackProfiles folder of your route  The document    How to  Provide Track Profiles for Open Rails Dynamic Track docm    describing the creation of track  profiles can be found in the OpenRails  Trunk Source Documentation folder  Forum discussions  about track profiles can also be found here     Page 30 of 206    6 10 2 Automatically tune settings to keep performance level   When this option is selected OR attempts to maintain the selected Target frame rate FPS    Frames per second   To do this it decreases or increases the viewing distance of the standard  terrain  If the option is selected  also select the desired FPS in the    Target frame rate    window     6 10 3 Double overhead wires  MSTS uses a single wire for electrified routes  you
232. s     These problems are not due to programming errors but to route signal script errors     Example  part of script only       if  enabled  amp  amp  route_set           if  block_state     BLOCK_CLEAR        normal clear  e g   state    SIGASP_CLEAR_1        else if  block_state     BLOCK_OCCUPIED  amp  amp  TrainHasCallOn            clear on occupied track and CallOn allowed  state    SIGASP_STOP_AND_PROCEED      else       track is not clear or CallOn not allowed  state    SIGASP_STOP             Page 146 of 206    10 15 5 TrainHasCallOn_ Restricted Function    This function has been introduced because signals with call on aspects can be used not only as  entrance signals for stations  but also on    free line    sections  that is  away from stations   TrainHasCallOn always allows call on if the signal is on a  free line    section  This is to allow proper  working for USA type permissive signals     Some signal systems however use these signals on sections where call on is not allowed  For this  case  the TrainHasCallOn_ Restricted function has been introduced     When approaching a station  both functions behave the same  but on    free line    sections  the  TrainHasCallOn_Restricted   will never allow call on     So  in a nutshell    Use on approach to stations    e TrainHasCallOn   and TrainHasCallOn_Restricted      e Activity   call on not allowed    e Timetable   call on allowed in specific situations  with  callon   stable or   attach commands     Use on    free l
233. s    Also note that  immediately after coupling  you may also find that the handbrakes of the newly  added cars have their handbrakes set to 100   see column headed    Handbrk      Pressing    Shift        Shift plus semicolon in English keyboards  will release all the handbrakes on the consist as  shown below  Pressing    Shift         Shift plus apostrophe on English keyboards  will set all of the  handbrakes  Cars without handbrakes will not have an entry in the handbrake column     If the newly coupled cars are to be moved without using their air brakes and parked nearby  the  brake pressure in their air hose may be left at zero  i e  their hoses are not connected to the train   s  air hose  Before the cars are uncoupled in their new location  their handbrakes should be set  The  cars will continue to report    State Emergency    while coupled to the consist because their BC value  is zero  they will not have any braking  The locomotive brakes must be used for braking  If the cars  are uncoupled while in motion  they will continue coasting     If the brakes of the newly connected cars are to be controlled by the train   s air pressure as part of  the consist  their hoses must be joined together and to the train   s air hose and their angle cocks  set correctly  Pressing the Backslash key      in English keyboards  please check the keyboard  assignments for other keyboards  connects the brake hoses between all cars that have been  coupled to the engine and sets the interme
234. s also refers to the Pictures folder by the name My Pictures    Page 54 of 206    7 13 Save and Resume  Open Rails provides Save and Resume facilities and keeps every save until you choose to delete  it   During the game you can save your session at any time by pressing F2     You can view the saved sessions by choosing an activity and then pressing the Resume Replay     button           Open Rails X2900    Route  Marias Pass   Location  Montana  USA   Route length  163 miles  270 km    Railroad  The Burlington Northern and Santa Fe Railway Company  BNSF       Locomotive  Dash 9 Vv    The GE 9 44CW  commonly called  the Dash 9    a modern diesel electric locomotive  most effective pulling  loads over long stretches at moderate speeds                                            This will display the list of any Saves you made for this activity     Page 55 of 206    To help you identify a Save  the list provides a screenshot and date and also distance travelled in  metres and the time and position of the player s train  This window can be widened to show the full  width of the strings in the left panel    mes   Settle  amp  Carlisle Line   Short P Srm     Saved At Time Distance Tile   24 04 2014 20 04 00 00 04 0 0  6112 7  24 04 2014 19 49 00 00 04 0 0  6112 7  15057 6  24 04 2014 19 27 00 00 06 0 0  6112 7  15057 6        O Saved Ga                      Invalid saves Delete  To prevent crashes and unexpected behaviour  Open Rails    invalidates games saved from older versions i
235. s alternatively powered on or off  At game start the engine  is powered on     With the keys Shift Y the helper diesel locomotives are alternatively powered on or off  At game  start the engines are powered on     Note that by using the Car Operation Menu you can also power on or off the helper locomotives  individually    7 6 2 Initialize Brakes   Entering this command fully releases the train brakes  Usually the train must be fully stopped for    this to be allowed  This action is usually not prototypical  Check the keyboard assignment for the  keys to be pressed  The command can be useful in three cases     1  A good number of locomotives do not have correct values for some brake parameters in the   eng file  MSTS ignores these  however OR uses all these parameters  and it may not allow the  brakes to release fully  Of course  it would be more advisable to correct these parameters     2  It may happen that the player does not want to wait for the time needed to recharge the brakes   however the use of the command in this case is not prototypical of course     3  The player may wish to immediately connect brake lines and recharge brakes after a coupling  operation  again  the use of the command is not prototypical     7 6 3 Connect Disconnect Brake Hoses   This command should be used after coupling or decoupling  As the code used depends on  keyboard layout  check the keys to be pressed as described in paragraph 6 5 or by pressing F1 at  runtime     More information on conn
236. s are described in detail below     Some sample activities can be found here     Page 133 of 206    10 13 2 Activity Design for Extended Al Train Shunting Functions  Activity design can be performed with the MSTS Activity Editor  and does not need post   processing of the created files     10 13 2 1 Extended Al Functions 1 to 4  these all involve coupling     It is not always desired that Al trains couple to other trains because of timing problems  for  instance  in case they were designed to run separately  So coupling is activated only if certain  conditions are met     In general the signal protection rules apply  that is  an Al train will find a red signal if its path leads  it directly to another train  So in general these functions can be used only if there are no signals  between the coupling train and the coupled train  However  at least in some cases  this can be  overcome in two modes     e by the activity developer  by inserting a double reversal point between the signal and  the coupled train  this works only if the double reversal point is not in the track section  occupied by the coupled train  or     e by the player  forcing the signal to the clear state by using the dispatcher window     Coupling with a static consist is not subject to other conditions  since if the activity designer  decided that the path would lead an Al train up to against a static consist  it was also desired that  the Al train would couple to it     Coupling with another Al train or with 
237. s can be defined using the following syntax     comment   column contains comment only and is ignored when reading the timetable    lt blank gt    column is extension of preceding column     11 3 3 Row definitions  A row is defined by the contents of the first column     Default  the first column defines the stop location     Special columns can be defined using the following syntax       comment   row contains comment only and is ignored when reading the timetable   lt blank gt    row is extension of row above    path   defines train path    consist   defines train consist    Page 152 of 206     start   defines time when train is started   note   defines general notes for this train   dispose   defines how train is handled after it has terminated    11 3 4 Timing details  Each cell which is at an intersection of a train column and a location row  can contain timing  details for that train at that location     Presently  only train stop details can be defined  Later on  passing times can also be defined   these passing times can be used to determine a train s delay     Control commands can be set at locations where the train stops  but can also be set for locations  where no timing is inserted as the train passes through that location without stopping     11 4 Timetable Data Details  11 4 1 Timetable Description  Although  comment rows and columns are generally ignored  the contents of the cell at the  intersection of the first  comment row and first  comment column is used a
238. s such a number      lt n gt  section is occupied by train  lt n gt      lt n gt   section is reserved for train  lt n gt         either with  lt n gt  or on its own  section is claimed by a train which is waiting for a  signal      amp   always in combination with  lt n gt   section is occupied by more than one train   deadlock info  always linked to a switch node         possible deadlock location   start of a single track section shared with a train running  in opposite direction       active deadlock   train from opposite direction is occupying or has reserved at least  part of the common single track section   Train will be stopped at this location   generally at the last signal ahead of this node       active deadlock at that location for other train   can be significant as this other train  can block this train s path     The dispatcher works by reserving track vector nodes for each train  An Al train will be allowed to  move  or start  only if all of the nodes up to the next potential passing location are not reserved for  another train  If this condition cannot be met  in Timetable Mode the Al train will not spawn     Page 65 of 206    There are other reasons why an Al train might not appear in Timetable Mode  The current  dispatcher assumes that all routes are unsignaled  The dispatcher issues a track authority  which  is similar to a track warrant  to all trains  For an Al train to start  the tracks it needs must not be  already reserved for another train  The disp
239. s the timetable  description and appears as the timetable   s name in the Open Rails menu     11 4 2 Train Details  The train name as defined in the first row must be unique for each train in a timetable file     This name is also used when referencing this train in a train command  see details below   The sequence of trains is not important     11 4 3 Location Details  At present  the possible locations are restricted to  platforms  as defined in the MSTS Route Editor     Each location must be set to the    Station Name    as defined in the platform definitions     The name used in the timetable must exactly match the name as used in the route definition    tdb  file   otherwise the location cannot be found and therefore cannot be processed     Also  each location name must be unique  as otherwise its position in the train path could be  ambiguous     The sequence of the locations is not important  as the order in which the stations are passed by a  train is defined in that train s path  For the same reason  a train s path can be set to just run in  between some of the locations  or be set to bypass certain stations     11 4 4 Timing Details  Each cell at an intersection of train and location can contain the timing details of that train at that  location     Times are defined as HH mm  and the 24 hour clock must be used   If a single time is inserted it is taken as the departure time  except at the final location    If both arrival and departure time are to be defined  these
240. se such trains can couple to other trains  and so on    2  The coupling train becomes an  Incorporated  train after coupling  that is it has no more cars or  locomotives  they all become part of the coupled train  and is a sort of virtual train  In this phase it  is not shown in the Consist information HUD  It will return to life when an uncoupling command   automatic or manual  is issued    3  To become an  Incorporated  train  the coupling train before coupling must pass in its path a  Waiting Point with value 60001  the effective waiting time is 0 seconds     4  For the coupling train to couple to the rear of the coupled train there are no particular  requirements  if however you want to have very short runs from coupling train start to coupling  moment  it could be necessary to insert a couple of reversal points in between  or else the train  could stop and avoid coupling  Please don t disdain double reversals  they are sometimes the only  way to limit the authority range of a train    5  If the coupling train has to couple to the front of the coupled train  obviously a reversal point is  needed for the coupling train  to be laid somewhere under the coupled train  or even farther down  in the same track section  also in this case there can be a problem of authority  that requires that  the coupled train has a couple of reversal points after the point where it waits to be coupled    6  The incorporated train has its own path  but from coupling to decoupling point it must p
241. settings  the train must be fully stopped  A sample F5 view with 50  LP is shown below    BRAKE INFORMATION   Main reservoir 140 psi   Car Type BrkCyl BrkPipe AuxRes ErgRes MRPipe RetValve TripleValve Handbrk Conn AnglCock BleedOff   0 0 1P 5 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release T A  B    0 1 1P 5 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release A  B     32884   0 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi X Release 0  A  B   32884   1 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release 0  A  B     32884   3 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release 0   32884   4 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi X Release 0   32884  5 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi Release 0     Page 100 of 206    A  B   A  B   A  B                 32884   2 1P 0 psi 90 psi 90 psi 90 psi X Release 0    A  B              8 6 2 Dynamic Brakes   Open Rails software supports dynamic braking for engines  To increase the Dynamic brakes press  Period     and Comma     to decrease them  Dynamic brakes are usually off at train startup  this  can be overridden by the related MSTS setting in the  eng file   the throttle works and there is no  value shown in the dynamic brake line in the HUD  To turn on dynamic brakes set the throttle to  zero and then press Period  Pressing Period successively increases the Dynamic braking forces  If  the value n in the MSTS parameter DynamicBrakesDelayTimeBeforeEngaging  n   is greater than  zero  the dynamic brake will engage only after n seconds  The throttle will not work when the  Dynamic brakes are on     The Dynamic brake force as a 
242. simplification for the player has been introduced for the player  train  if the train stops with the single passenger car outside of the platform  the stop is still  considered valid     All this is compatible with MSTS operation  only the fact that the scheduled departure time is  considered for Al trains differs  as it is considered an improvement     10 13 Extended Al Train Shunting  for content developers     10 13 1 General  When this option is selected further Al train shunting functions are available  Note that this option  is not available in Timetable mode     The following additional shunting functions are available   1  Al train couples to a static consist and restarts with it     2  Al train couples to a player or Al train and becomes part of it  the coupled Al train continues on  its path     3  Al train couples to a player or Al train and leaves to it its cars  the coupled and coupling train  continue on their path     4  Al train couples to a player or Al train and    steals    its cars  the coupled and coupling train  continue on their path     5  Al train uncouples any number of its cars  the uncoupled part becomes a static consist  With  the same function it is possible to couple any number of cars from a static consist     6  Al train couples to a player or Al train  the resulting combined train runs for part of the path   then stops  the train is split there into two parts that continue on their own paths     join and split     function      These function
243. ssing Path Processing  for content developers     Passing paths can be used to allow trains to pass one another on single track routes  The required  passing paths are defined per train path in the MSTS Activity Editor or in the native ORTS path  editor included within TrackViewer     The present version is an    intermediate    stage leading to complete new processing  The data  structure and processing have already been prepared for the next stage  when    alternative paths      not just a single passing path but multiple paths through a certain area  will be defined per  location  and no longer per train     The present version  however  is still based on the MSTS activity and path definition  and therefore  is still based on the definition of alternative paths per train     Page 130 of 206    The setup of this version is as detailed below      e Passing paths defined for the player train are available to all trains   in both directions   The    through    path of the player train is taken to be the  main  path through that  location  This only applies to Activity mode  as there is no predefined player train  when running in Timetable mode     e Each train can have definitions for additional passing paths  these will be available to  that train only   Note that this implies that there can be more than one passing path per location     e When possible passing locations are determined for each pair of trains  the train  lengths are taken into consideration   A location is on
244. st signal  If a train is moving and passes a signal in the opposite  direction  the route behind the train will automatically retract to that signal as that is now the next  signal in the reverse route  The same restrictions apply with respect to signals ahead when the  train is running in reverse     The route orientation will not change whatever direction the train is running  It is fixed to the  orientation of the route as it was the moment the player switched to Manual Mode  So  changing to  a reverse facing cab or changing the position of the loco s reverser does not change the direction  of the route orientation  This is not a limitation to the train   s behaviour  as routes are always    Page 124 of 206    cleared in both directions  It does  however  affect the display of the F4 and F8 windows  as the  top bottom direction of these windows is linked to the route direction and will therefore not change  if the train reverses  To assist the player in his orientation in which direction the train is moving  an     eye    has been added to these displays symbolizing the direction of the cabview  and an    arrow     has been added to symbolize the direction of the reverser     The player can set all switches in the train   s path using the F8 window or the G Shift G keys  The  G key will set the first switch ahead of the train  as defined by the route direction   Shift G sets the  switch behind the train  It is also possible to set switches as required using the Alt Left Mo
245. stops     If the train does accidentally run backward  e g  due to slipping or setting back after overshooting a  platform  only safety checks are performed for the rear end of the train with respect to signals   switch alignment  other trains and end of track  There is no check on speed limits behind the train     Setting switches using the F8 window or G Shift G is not allowed  Setting switches using Alt left  mouseclick is possible  but is not allowed for switches in the train   s path  However  any switches  set manually will automatically be reset by an approaching train according to that train   s path  So   in Auto Mode the train cannot deviate from the defined path     A request to clear a signal ahead of the train using the Tab command is only allowed when the  track ahead is occupied by another train which is at a stand still  and when that track is in the  train   s route  A request to clear a signal which would lead the train off its route is not allowed  A  request to clear a signal behind the train using Shift Tab is also not possible     Auto Mode is intended for normal running under control of signals or traffic control  Shunting  moves can be performed if fully defined in the train   s path  using reversal points etc     10 3 1 1 Details on Auto Mode     Auto Signal     amp     Auto Node      There are two sub modes to Auto Mode  Auto Signal and Auto Node     Auto Signal is the normal mode on signalled routes  The train   s route is generally cleared from  si
246. sure in the remaining consist  and  optionally in the uncoupled consist  is maintained  The remaining consist will then not go into     Emergency    state     When working with cars in a switch yard  cars can be coupled  moved and uncoupled without  connecting them to the train   s air braking system  see the F5 HUD for Braking   Braking must then  be provided by the locomotive   s independent brakes  A car or group of cars can be uncoupled with  air brakes active so that they can be recoupled after a short time without recharging the entire  brake line     Bottling the Air      To do this  close the angle cocks on both ends of the car or group  before uncoupling  Cars uncoupled while the consist is moving  that have had their air pressure  reduced to zero before uncoupling  will coast freely     In Open Rails  opening the bleed valve on a car or group of cars performs two functions  it vents  the air pressure from the brake system of the selected cars  and also bypasses the air system  around the cars if they are not at the end of the consist so that the rest of the consist remains  connected to the main system  In real systems the bypass action is performed by a separate valve  in each car  In the F5 HUD Braking display  the text    Bleed    appears on the car   s display line until  the air pressure has fallen to zero     More information about manipulating the brakes during coupling and uncoupling can also be found  here     7 4 12 F10 Activity Monitor  The Activity Monit
247. system  1P  single pipe system  V  vacuum etc   and the current state of the air brakes on the unit   More information on this display can be found in Open Rails Braking and F9 Train Operations  Monitor     7 15 4 Extended HUD for Train Force Information  In the first part of this display some information related to the player locomotive is shown  The  information format differs if advanced adhesion has been selected or not in the Simulation    Options     The table part shows total force for up to ten locos cars in the train  The first number shows the  position of the car in the train  The second number is the total force acting on the car  This is the  sum of the other forces after the signs are properly adjusted  The next number is the motive force  which should only be non zero for locomotives  and that becomes negative during dynamic  braking  Next number is the brake force  Follows the friction force calculated from the Davis  equation  The following value is the force due to gravity  Next values are the friction forces due to  the car being in a curve and or in a tunnel  The next value is the coupler force between this car  and the next  negative is pull and positive is push   The mass in kg and the track elevation in    under the car follow  All of the force values are in Newtons  Many of these values are relative to  the orientation of the car  but some are relative to the train  If applicable  two further fields appear   the first is  True  if the car is flipped wi
248. t is 90  accurate on the state level  and 81  ac  users indicate 60  accurate within 25 miles     By default this tool will lookup the IP address that you are using  Yoi  his is your IP   for emergency purposes  tryin   ire 100  accuracy           This information should not be  other purposes that would ri    Please enter the IP a s you want to lookup below     100 0 0 1   Lookup IP Address    13 2 Port Forwarding  If you are using a router at home with several computers  your router needs to be told which  computer on your home network should receive the network data OpenRails needs  This is done  by enabling Port Forwarding on the router  The default port OpenRails uses is 30 000  If you  change that port number in the game you ll need to change the forwarded port number in the  router as well  Your router must be told to forward data arriving from the internet on the correct  port to the network IP address of the computer running OpenRails  For more information on  Network Address Translation  NAT  and how Port Forwarding works  see this site     http   www 4remotesupport com 4content remote support NAT html Here The following are the  steps     1  Go to http   portforward com english routers port_forwarding   which contains a lot of ads   just  focus on the center of this page     2  Locate the name of the manufacturer of your router  i e  Airlink and click it     Page 179 of 206    2wire   3com   A Link  Above Cable  Accton   Acer   ACorp  Actiontec  Adaptec  ADDON  Adv
249. tead of the inner rail  and  thereby reviving the extra flange friction  It should be emphasized that the flange friction arising  from the play of the forces here under discussion is distinct from and in excess of the flange  friction which arises from the action of the flanges in forcing the truck to follow the track curvature   This excess being a variable element of curve resistance  we may expect to find that curve  resistance reaches a minimum value when this excess reduces to zero  that is  when the car  speed reaches the critical value referred to  This critical speed depends only on the super   elevation  the track gauge  and the radius of the track curvature  The resulting variation of curve    resistance with speed is indicated in Fig 3     Centre of Gravity    mT           B   tt J    J   U  Ee A Fr vas        co      Figure 2   Description of forces on rolling stock transitioning a curve  8 8 5 Calculation of Curve Resistance  R WF D L 2r  Where R   Curve resistance  W   vehicle weight  F   Coefficient of Friction  u   0 5 for dry   smooth steel to steel  wet rail 0 1   0 3  D   track gauge  L   Rigid wheelbase  r   curve    radius   Source  The Modern locomotive by C  Edgar Allen   1912    8 8 6 Calculation of Curve Speed Impact  The above value represents the least value amount of resistance  which occurs at the equilibrium    speed  and as described above will increase as the train speed increases and decreases from the  equilibrium speed  This concept is show
250. ter    Open Rails Train Operation        6 10 9 Autopilot   With this option enabled and when in activity mode  it is possible to stay in the cab of the player  train  but to let Open Rails move the train  respecting path  signals  soeeds and station stops    It is possible to switch the player train between autopilot mode and player driven mode at run time   The Autopilot mode is described here     6 10 10 ETCS circular speed gauge  When this option is selected  it is possible to add to the cabview a circular speed gauge  accordingly to the European standard train control system ETCS     7s OO0ES000H0    ogogo    Oponppo0an       For content developers  The gauge is added by the insertion of a block like the following into the  cvf  file                          Digital    Type   SPEEDOMETER DIGITAL    Style   NEEDLE    Position   160 255 56 56    ScaleRange   0 250    Units   KM PER HOUR                    6 10 11 Extend object maximum viewing distance to horizon   With this option selected  all objects viewable up to the viewing distance defined in the Video  Options are displayed  As a default ORTS only displays objects up to 2000 m  distance  Selecting  this option improves display quality but may reduce frame rate     6 10 12 Load DDS textures in preference to ACE  Open Rails is capable of loading both ACE and DDS textures  If only one of the two is present  it is  loaded  If both are present  the ACE texture is loaded unless this option has been selected     Page 32 of
251. tes on the Track Monitor     Distance value is displayed for first object only  and only when within distance of the  first fixed marker   Distance is not shown for next station stop     When no signal is within the normal display distance but a signal is found at a further  distance  the signal aspect is displayed in the advance signal area  The distance to  this signal is also shown    This only applies to signals  not to speedposts     For Auto mode     if the train is moving forward  the line separating the Backward information area is  shown in red  and no Backward information is shown    If the train is moving backward  the separation line is shown in white  and Backward  information is shown if available     For Manual mode    if the train is on its defined path  and toggling back to Auto control is possible   the  own train symbol is shown in white  otherwise it is shown in red     The colour of the track lines is an indication of the train   s speed compared to the  maximum allowed speed      Dark green   low speed  well below allowed maximum  Light green   optimal speed  just below maximum  Orange   slight overspeed but within safety margin    Dark red   serious overspeed  danger of derailment or crashing    Note that the placement of the display objects with respect to the distance offset is indicative only   If multiple objects are placed at short intermediate distances  the offset in the display is increased  such that the texts do not overlap  As a result  only 
252. th respect to the train or    False    otherwise  while the second  field signals coupler overload     Page 61 of 206    FORCE INFORMATION  Wheel slip    Conditions 38    Axle drive force 425953 N   Axle brake force 140000 N   Num of substeps 50  filtered by 10   Solver RungeKutta4  Stability correction 2   Axle out force 265651 N  2019 KW     Car Total Motive Brake Friction Gravity Curve Tunnel Coupler  Mass Elev Notes  67940 265651 140000 2145 351 98 0 00  552147 1154999 0 00  44139 218399 70773 1596 228 68 0 00 1568774100700 0 00  42189 61009  90000 1552 443 27  0 00  837 03 1296250 0 00  27351 0 55000 1210 14170 0 00 0 62400 0 00             The upper graph displays the motive force in   of the player locomotive  Green colour means  tractive force  red colour means dynamic brake force     The lower graph refers     roughly speaking   to the level of refinement used to compute axle force     The next extended HUD displays Dispatcher Information  It is very useful to troubleshoot activities  or timetables  The player train and any Al trains will show in the Dispatcher Information  a line for  each train     DISPATCHER INFORMATION   Train Travelled Speed MES Al mode Al data      Mode Auth Distance Signal  0F Oyd 0 0mph 0 0mph 310G OOPA   33 7mi 29 0mph 30 0mph RUN 044 amp 000  SIGN CLR2  11 86mi 38 2mph 40 0mph RUN 050 amp 000  SIGN CLR2    F  F       A detailed explanation of the various columns follows   e Train  Internal train number  with P Passenger and F Freight     e 
253. the end of the path must match the start of the path  for the new train      in_time   time   time definition when the inward run must be started  Time is defined  as HH mm and must use the 24 hour clock      runround  lt path gt     lt path gt  is the path to be used by the engine to perform the runround   For details  see the  forms command definition of the time at which the  runround is to take place  The time must be defined in HH mm and must use  the 24 hour clock      rrtime time   time is the definition of the time at which the runaround is to take  place  The time must be defined in HH mm and must use the 24 hour clock      rrpos    lt runround position gt    the position within the  stable  move at which the runround  is to take place     Possible values     out   the runround will take place before the outward move is started    stable   the runround will take place at the  stable  position    in   the runround will take place after completion of the inward move    static   train will become a  static  train after completing the outward move      forms  lt train gt    train will form the new train after completion of the inward move  See  the  forms command for details      triggers  lt train gt   train will trigger the new train after completion of the inward move  The  train will change to the consist of the new train at the    stable    position  See the   triggers command for details     Use of command qualifiers    In combination with  static     out_path   co
254. the execution of some functions in ORTS and MSTS are  given here     10 1 1 Player Paths  Al Paths  and How Switches Are Handled   If the player path requires a switch to be aligned both ways  the alignment that is the last on the  path is used  If an Al train crosses the player path before the player train gets there  the Al train will  leave the switches aligned for the main route  the default setting for most switches     If you throw a switch to move into a siding  the switch at the far end of the siding is aligned to let  you leave when your train first occupies the siding  But after that it is not changed back to its  original setting  If the switch gets thrown the other way  you can leave the siding with the switch  aligned incorrectly  If you uncouple and re couple to the train while it occupies the misaligned  switch  the rear end of the train will switch tracks     10 2 Open Rails Al  10 2 1 Basic Al Functionality    e OR supports Al trains  In time  the Al system will become more advanced with new  features     e OR supports two distinct ways of controlling trains  it supports traditional activities in  compatibility with MSTS  and it also supports Timetable mode  Note that various  options and settings are sometimes limited to either activity or Timetable mode     e Al trains can meet if both paths have passing sections defined at the same place     e Waiting points and reverse points work  Reverse points can be used in both Activity  and Timetable modes  while wa
255. the first object is always shown at the correct    position  all  train     other objects are as close to their position as allowed by other objects closer to the    Page 42 of 206      g anc I al  Hit the F6 key to bring up the siding and platform names within a region  These can be crowded so  hitting Shift F6 will cycle through showing platforms only  sidings only  and both     Hitting F6 again removes both siding and platform names        Open Rails       a     __      saaa          e Ee                    Hitting the F7 key displays train service names  player train always has    Player    as identification    Hitting Shift F7 displays the rolling stock IDs     Coupler force namic brake    ntograp  FPS       Page 43 of 206    In a multiplayer session  player controlled trains will have the id specified by the player     PYUVEMUWIES WERE            agin 32768  32770   21   fevel 18607 L KEDD oat 32708 32770  22  Hesel flow 7 Uh  34 g 32768 32770   20  siling 768 32770  17  32768 32770  15  32768 32770   13  32768 32770  10   32768 32770  7   32768 32770  5    fang l0sTangi u    7 4 10 F8 Switch Monitor    Use the Switch Monitor  enabled by the F8 key  to see the direction of the turnout directly in  front and behind the train     fF Switch  Eye indicating Cab direction           ee aai  Arrow indicating reverser direction     yp      lt _    Switch backward    There are 4 ways to change the direction     Click on the turnout icon in the Switch Monitor     Press the G key 
256. the player train is subject to the following conditions  Either     e the coupling happens in the last path section of the coupling Al train  and the path end  point is under the coupled train or beyond it in the same section  or    e the coupling happens in the last section before a reverse point of the coupling Al train   and the reverse point is under the coupled train or beyond it in the same section     In this way undesired couplings are avoided in case the Al train has its path running in the same  direction beyond the coupled train     Just after coupling OR performs another check to define what happens next   In the case where the coupled train is static     e if there is at least one reverse point further in the path or if there are more than 5 track  sections further in the path  the coupling train couples with the static train  and then  the resulting formed train restarts following the path of the coupling train  or    e if not  the coupling train couples with the static train and becomes part of the static  train itself  is absorbed by it   stopping movement     In case the coupled train is a player train or an Al train     e if there is at least one reverse point further in the path of the coupling train  the  coupling train couples with the coupled train  at that point there are two possibilities     1  The trainset coupling to the coupled train is a wagon  in this case the coupling train leaves to  the coupled train all the cars between its locomotive and the
257. the train is too long for the platform  it  will stop at the signal  But if the train length is more than double the platform length   the signal will not be held     Al trains will adhere to the speed limits   Al trains will stop at a signal approximately 30 m  short of a signal at danger     At waiting points  the Al trains will stop at the waiting point  Any signal beyond the  waiting point is kept at danger until the required departure time     Where Al trains are allowed to follow other trains in the same section passing  permissive signals  the train will adjust its speed to that of the train ahead  and follow  at a distance of approx  300m  If the train ahead has stopped  the train behind will  draw up to a distance of about 50m  However  if the train ahead is stopped in a  station  and the train behind is also booked to stop at that station  the train will draw  up behind the first train up to a distance of a few metres     The control of Al trains before the start of an activity is similar to the normal control  during an activity  except that the update frequency is reduced from the normal update  rate to just once per second  But all rules regarding speed limits  station stops   deadlock  interaction between Al trains  signals etc   are followed  The position of all  Al trains at the start of an activity therefore is as close as possible to what it would  have been if the activity had been started at the start time of the first Al train     10 11 Location linked Pa
258. this changes the size of the needle that OR displays     Dial     Type   SPEEDOMETER DIAL     Position   549 156 10 50     Graphic   Speed recorder needle 2 01l ace    Style   NEEDLE     ScaleRange   0 140     ScalePos   243 115     Units   KM PER HOUR     Pivot   38     DirIncrease   0                                             Page 186 of 206    O MAN GiM  OASM LigmMTs    t    Y wo       Page 187 of 206    Shown above are two pictures of one hi res 2D cabview  one showing the whole cab  and the  other one showing the detail of some controls  In this example the cab background image used  was cut down to 2560x1600  The texture for the Speed Recorder needle is 183x39 and for the  brake gauge needles is 181x29  Note the odd number for the width  This is required as OR  and  MSTS  assume the needle is in the center of the image  The Reversing and Headlight switch  animation frames are 116x116     There are as yet no specific tools to create these cabviews  a standard image manipulation  program to do all textures is required  and to create any new items  e g  the gauge faces  a  standard drawing program can be used  To actual set up the cabview and to position the  animations the  cvf file is modified with a standard text editor  and OR is used as a viewer  using a  straight section of track on a quick loading route  Through successive iterations one arrives quite  quickly at a satisfactory result     15 2 1 Configurable Fonts  OR supports a configurable font family  with font
259. ties     Boiler Evaporation Area   consisted of the part of the firebox in contact with the boiler and the heat  tubes running through the boiler  This area determined the amount of heat that could be  transferred to the water in the boiler  As a rule of thumb a boiler could produce approximately 12   15lbs h of steam per sq  ft  of evaporation area     Boiler Superheater Area   Typically modern steam locomotives are superheated  whereas older  locomotives used only saturated steam  Superheating is the process of putting more heat into the  steam without changing the pressure  This provided more energy in the steam and allowed the  locomotive to produce more work  but with a reduction in steam and fuel usage  In other words a  superheated locomotive tended to be more efficient then a saturated locomotive     Cylinder  Work done     To drive the locomotive forward  steam was injected into the cylinder which pushed the piston  backwards and forwards  and this in turn rotated the drive wheels of the locomotive  Typically the  larger the drive wheels  the faster the locomotive was able to travel     The faster the locomotive travelled the more steam that was needed to drive the cylinders  The    Page 84 of 206    steam able to be produced by the boiler was typically limited to a finite value depending upon the  design of the boiler  In addition the ability to inject and exhaust steam from the cylinder also  tended to reach finite limits as well  These factors typically combined t
260. tilities  In most cases  the Open Rails  software will ignore the error in the file and run properly  Open Rails software logs these errors in a  log file on the user   s desktop  This log file may be used to correct problems identified by the Open  Rails software     4 1 Trainset  The software currently supports Shape   s   Shape Definition   sd   Sound   sms   Cab   cvf   and  texture Ace   ace  files  including displaying the correct LOD  alpha and transparency attributes   Moreover it supports the file types  Engine   eng   Wagon   wag   It substitutes MSTS style physics  to enable the user to operate trains     4 2 Consists  Open Rails software reads and displays Consist files   con  used for Player Train  Al Train  and  Loose Consists in activities     4 3 Services  Open Rails software supports MSTS Service files   srv  for the creation of both Player and Al  services     4 4 Paths  Open Rails software supports MSTS Path files   pat  for determining the path of both Player and Al  Trains     4 5 Routes  Open Rails software supports the following MSTS Route files with the limitations noted     e Route Database file   rdb    CarSpawner is supported     e Reference File   ref    Open Rails does not provide a Route Editor in the current  release     e Track Database file   tdb      supported   e Route File   trk      Level Crossings and overhead wires are supported   e Sigcfg   dat  file     Signal  amp  scripting capabilities are supported    e Sigscr   dat  file     Signa
261. tion   Keyboard   Data logger Evaluation   content   Updater   Experimental      I  Log trainspeed    30   l Interval  sec        Time   Train Speed  Max  Speed  Signal State  Track Elevation  Direction  Control Mode  Distance Travelled  Throttle    Brake Cy  Press  Dyn Brake    Gear Setting       OOOOOOUOU     68        IV Logstation stops       When data logging is started  see preceding paragraph   data selected in this panel are logged   allowing a later evaluation on how the activity was executed by the player     Page 26 of 206    Options mmm       General   Audio   Video   Simulation   Keyboard   Data logger   Evaluation Content   Updater   Experimental    Installation profiles tell Open Rails whereto look for game content  Add each full and mini route MSTS installation       Default   E  Program Files 2 Microsoft Games Train Simulator  E London  amp  Port Stanley E  Miniroutes LPS301  E Monon 16 E   Miniroutes Monon 16   E   Miniroutes  Monon 17   E  Miniroutes GTA TIR   E   Miniroutes Train Simulator PRR Fix06   E   Miniroutes Dominion_Atiantic   E   Miniroutes LGVMed   E   Miniroutes NEC V4   E   Miniroutes  Pocohontas    E   Miniroutes  Surfliner    F  Miniroutes Backup  Monon 17  F  MSTS Installs  Miniroutes GTA TIR    MSIS Installs Miniroutes surtin        6 8 Content Options  This window allows you to add  remove or modify access to additional MSTS installations or  miniroute installations for Open Rails  Installations located on other drives  or on a USB key  c
262. tion for the developer trying to solve your problem     Once your post has been submitted  keep adding further information only in additional posts  in  order to avoid the risk of people not noticing your edits  Also  please be patient with developers  responding to your report  Most forums are checked only once a day  so it may take some time for  a developer to see your report     Important  The more information a developer gets from the first post  the quicker he will be able to  locate  identify and eventually resolve a bug  On the other hand  reports of the form   I have  problem XYZ with recently installed Open Rails  Can you help me   are of little use  as all required  information must be asked for first     Important  Please do not rush to report a Decided Bug on the Bug Tracker before a developer has  declared your problem a real bug     The above description is available in a condensed  checklist  form below     19 4 Decided bugs  Most bug reports never even make it to the status of a Decided Bug  due to either being resolved  too quickly to be worthy of an entry on the Bug Tracker or being a content or user error  Some  Maybe Bugs  however  will eventually be declared Decided Bugs  Such secured bugs should be  reported at our Bug Tracker  when the developer taking the report asks you to     The Open Rails Bug Tracker is found at https   ougs Launchpad net or   following the  Report a  bug  link in the upper half to the right of the screen  You will need to registe
263. to  depart    Other situation are for freight trains  light engines and empty stock  which also usually do not  wait for the signal to clear but draw up to the signal so as to take as little as time as possible  to exit the station     The  nowaitsignal qualifier can be set per station  in the station column   or per train   If set per station  it can be overruled by  waitsignal per train      terminal    The  terminal command changes the calculation of the stop position  and makes the train  stop at the terminating end of the platform    Whether the platform is really a terminating platform  and at which end it terminates  is  determined by a check of the train s path    If the platform is in the first section of a train s path  or there are no junctions in the path  leading up to the section which holds the platform  it is assumed the train starts at a terminal  platform and the end of the train is placed close to the start of the platform    If the platform is in the last section if the path or there are no junctions beyond the section  which holds the platform  it is assumed the platform is at the end of the train s path and the  train will run up to near the end of the platform in its direction of travel    If neither condition is met  it is assumed it is not a terminal platform after all  and the normal  stop position is calculated    The  terminal option can be set for a station  or for individual trains  If set for a station it    Page 162 of 206    cannot be overrule
264. to platforms occupied by other  trains such that the total length of both trains far exceeds the platform length  so the second train  will block the    station throat    stopping all other trains  This can easily lead to a complete lock up of  all traffic in and around the station     To prevent this  calling on should be blocked in station areas even if the signalling would allow it   To allow a train to    call on    when this is required in the timetable  the  callon command must be set  which overrules the overall block  This applies to both Al and player train   In case the train is to attach to another train in the platform  calling on is automatically set     Because of the inability of Al trains in MSTS to stop properly behind another train if    called on  onto  an occupied track  most signalling systems do not support  call on  aspects but instead rely on the  use of    permission requests     Al trains cannot issue such a request  therefore in such systems   callon will not work     In this situation  attach commands can also not work in station areas   Note that the  runround  command also requires  call on  ability for the final move of the engine    back to the train to attach to it  Therefore  when performed in station areas  also the runround can  only work if the signalling supports    call on       Special signalling functions are available to adapt signals to function as described above  which  can be used in the scripts for relevant signals in the sigscr 
265. two trains cannot reference  the same train in the  ahead parameter as that would cause conflict    If the total length of all trains exceeds the length of the sidings  the trains will    spill out    onto    Page 156 of 206    whatever lies beyond   Note that a train referenced in an  ahead parameter must be created before or at the same  time as the train which uses that reference      Note row    The  note row can be used to defined control commands which are not location related but  apply to the full run of the train  It can also be used to set commands for trains which do not  stop at or pass through any defined location  This row is optional     The following commands can be inserted in the  note field of each train      acc n   dec n    These commands set multiplication factors for the acceleration   acc  and deceleration    dec  values used for that train     The program uses average acceleration and deceleration values for all trains  difference  values for freight  passenger and high speed trains   But these values are not always  adequate  especially for modern trains  This can lead to delays when trying to run to a real life  timetable    Using the  acc and  dec commands  the values used can be modified  Note that these  commands do not define an actual value  but define a factor  the default value will be  multiplied by this factor    However  setting a higher value for acceleration and deceleration does not mean that the  trains will always accelerate and decel
266. ty file   act    Scrolling is accomplished by clicking on the arrows at the left or right bottom corners of the  window     Train Operations       Clicking on the coupler icon between any two cars uncouples the consist at that point   You can also uncouple cars from your player train by pressing the U key and clicking with the  mouse on the couplers in the main window   By clicking on any car in the above window  the Car Operation Menu appears  By clicking in this  menu it is possible    e to apply and release the handbrake of the car     e to power on or power off the car  if it is a locomotive   This applies for both electric  and diesel locomotives     e to connect or disconnect locomotive operation with that of the player locomotive   e to connect or disconnect the car   s air hoses from the rest of the consist     e to toggle the angle cocks on the air hoses at either end of the car between open and  closed     e to toggle the bleed valve on the car to vent the air pressure from the car   s reservoir  and release the air brakes to move the car without brakes  e g  humping  etc       i Car Operation Menu  Toggle Handbrake  Toggle Power  Toggle MU Connection    Toggle Brake Hose Connection    Open Close Front Angle Cock    Open Close Rear Angle Cock  Open Close Bleed Off Valve    Close window       Page 45 of 206    By toggling the angle cocks on individual cars it is possible to close selected angle cocks of the air  hoses so that when the cars are uncoupled  the air pres
267. u are in the loco s cabview with the train moving autonomously  accordingly to path and station stops and of course respecting speed limits and signals  You still  have control over the horn  bell  lights  doors  and some other controls that do not affect train  movement  The main levers are controlled by the autopilot mode  and indications are correct     You can at any moment switch back to player driven mode  by pressing Alt A  and can again  switch to autopilot mode by again pressing Alt A     When in player driven mode you can also change cab or direction  However  if you return to    Page 50 of 206    autopilot mode  you must be on the train s path  other cases are not managed  When in player  driven mode you can also switch to manual  but before returning to autopilot mode you must first  return to auto mode     Station stops  waiting points and reverse points are synchronized as far as possible in the two  modes     Cars can also be uncoupled in autopilot mode  but check that the train will stop in enough time   otherwise it is better to change to player driven mode   A static consist can also be coupled in  autopilot mode     The Request to Clear signal  Tab key  works in the sense that the signal opens  However in  autopilot mode at the moment that the train stops you must switch to player driven mode to pass  the signal and then you can return to autopilot mode     Note that if you run with Advanced Adhesion enabled  you may have wheelslip when switching  from auto
268. ult OR uses the figures shown above in the    Typical Rigid Wheelbase  Values    section  The starting curve resistance value has been assumed to be 200   and has been  built into the speed impact curves  OR calculates the curve resistance based upon the actual  wheelbases provided by the player or the appropriate defaults  It will use this as the value at     Equilibrium Speed     and then depending upon the actual calculated equilibrium speed  from the  speed limit module  it will factor the resistance up as appropriate to the current train speed     Steam locomotive wheelbase approximation     the following approximation is used to determine  the default value for the fixed wheelbase of a steam locomotive     WheelBase 1 25  axles    1   DrvWheelDiameter    8 9 3 Typical Rigid Wheelbase Values  The following values are used as defaults where actual values are not provided by the player     Rolling Stock Type Typical value    Freight Bogie type stock  2 wheel 5    6     1 6764m   bogie     Passenger Bogie type stock  2 8     2 4384m   wheel bogie     Passenger Bogie type stock  3 12     3 6576m     wheel bogie    Typical 4 wheel rigid wagon 11    6     3 5052m    Typical 6 wheel rigid wagon 12     3 6576m    Tender  6 wheel  14    3     4 3434m    Diesel  Electric Locomotives Similar to passenger stock   Steam locomotives Dependent on   of drive wheels  Can be up to 20       e g  large 2 10 0 locomotives    Modern publications suggest an allowance of approximately 0 8 lb  p
269. ult in better regulation where  maxdelay or  owndelay parameters are  used     11 5 5 No Automatic Coupling   There is logic within the program which for any stopped train checks if it is close enough to  another train to couple to this train  It is this logic which allows the player train to couple to any  static train    However  this logic contains some actions which do not match the processing of timetable trains   Therefore this has now been disabled for timetable mode  Presently  therefore  coupling of trains  is not possible in timetable mode except for runround commands in dispose options    Also uncoupling through the F9 window could be disabled in the near future for timetable mode    In due course  new attach detach functions will be included in the timetable concept to replace the  existing functions     11 5 6 Signalling Requirements and Timetable Concept    11 5 6 1 General    The timetable concept is more demanding of the performance of the signalling system than     normal activities  The main reason for this is that the timetable will often have Al trains running in  both directions  including trains running ahead of the player train in the same direction as the  player train  There are very few activities with such situations as no effort would of course be  made to define trains in an activity which would never be seen  but also because MSTS could not  always properly handle such a situation     Any flaws in signalling  e g  signals clearing the path of a t
270. ure psi pressure psi pounds per square inch  bar atmospheres  kpa Kilopascals  inhg vacuum inhg inches of mercury  Pressure  Rate of psi s psi s  Change  bar s  kpa s  inhg s  Energy kj kg kj kg Kilojoules per kilogram  Density  j g  btu 1b Board of Trade Units per pound  Temperature degc degc  Difference  degf  Angle radians    deg  Angular Rate   rad s   rad s  Other   lb hp h   e g  CoalBurnage                      Page 207 of 206       
271. useclick  command  Switches can be set even if they are in the train   s path and a signal has been cleared  over that path  Switches  of course  can not be set if already set as part of a cleared route for  another train     The following rules apply to the setting of switches      e all switches will remain in the position in which they were set by the last train passing  over that switch  If no train has yet passed over the switch  it is in its default position     e when in Manual Mode  trailing switches will not be automatically aligned for the  approaching player train  except     e when a route is cleared through a signal while in Manual Mode  any trailing switches  in the train   s path up to the end of authority  e g  next signal  will be aligned   Note that in this case  trailing switches in the path cleared by the signal can no longer  be reset     Signals which the train approaches will not be cleared automatically  The player must request  clearance of all signals encountered  by using the Tab or Shift Tab keys     The Tab key will clear the signal ahead of the train  according to the route direction   the Shift Tab  key will clear the signal behind the train  Repeated use of  Shift  Tab will clear the next signal  beyond the first cleared signal etc   but only up to the maximum clearing distance     Signals will always clear on request except when the section immediately behind the signal is  already cleared for a train from the opposite direction  The normal ro
272. usly  described and the height of the centre of gravity then becomes significant in determining the  location of the resulting force Fr relative to the centre line of the track  The elasticity of the  suspension system of rolling stock under conditions of non equilibrium will introduce a roll element  that affects the horizontal displacement of the centre of gravity and that must also be considered  when determining the location of the resulting force Fr     8 10 11 Calculation of Curve Velocity   The generic formula for calculating the various curve velocities is as follows   V EgrG       Where  E   Ea  track super elevation    Ec  unbalanced super elevation   g   acceleration due to gravity  r   radius of curve  G   track gauge    8 10 12 Typical Super Elevation Values  amp  Speed Impact   Mixed Passenger  amp  Freight  Routes    The values quoted below are    typical    but may vary from country to country     Track super elevation typically will not be more than 6 inches  150mm   Naturally  depending upon  the radius of the curve  speed restrictions may apply     Normally unbalanced super elevation is typically restricted to 3 inches  75mm   and is usually only  allowed for passenger stock     Tilt trains may have values of up to 12 inches  805mm      Page 110 of 206       Typical Super Elevation Values  amp  Speed Impact   High Speed Passenger Routes    Cant D Cant deficiency  Unbalanced   SuperElevation  SuperElevation    mm  I  mm    CEN  draft      Tilting trains 180 
273. usted in  Kg  series of x  amp        generation       y values                Page 94 of 206       Multiplication  factor for steam    As per loco specs    ORTSCylinderEfficiencyRate   1 0                                                        ad F N  a nde ne MICIEMEyateLE7G  ENG cylinder  force  aqar  unlimited    NB  leave out if not used  output  x     coal burning  Tabular input rate per hour  describing the  Ibs ft    y      ORTSBoilerEfficiency  x  y  ENG efficiency ofthe   boiler As per loco specs New NB  leave out if not used  boiler against coal   efficiency   combustion series of x  amp  y  values   Point at which the As per loco specs  RTSCyl ExhaustO 10 0  ORTSCylinderExhaustOpen   x   ENG cylinder exhaust Factor  between 0 1   New ORTAN erR ieee pen    NB  leave out if not used  port opens 0 95       As per loco specs   i  ORTSCylinderPortOpening   x   ENG alee  evn Factor  between 0 05     New RTS yina tat Ope Rink  0083  port opening 0 12  NB  leave out if not used  Tabular input s  wheel  describing the    initial pressure speed MABE y  ORTSCylinderlInitialPressureDrop   x  y   ENG   pressure drop   As per loco specs New NB  leave out if not used  drop as   TO  i factor  series of  locomotive speed    x  amp  y values   increases  Tabular input  Ana da x     indicated  Increase in back HP  y    i li BackP 10   ORTSCylinderBackPressure   x  y   ENG PESE aa backpressure As per loco specs New PRVINE TASANE Pa  locomotive     NB  leave out if not used  nee  atm 
274. ute setting limitations etc  are  ignored  The signal will only clear to the first available most restrictive aspect above Stop     Note that  in contrast to the situation in Auto Mode  as the signal will clear even if the full route  behind the signal is not available  a cleared signal is no indication of the cleared distance beyond  that signal  It may be that the first switch beyond the signal is already cleared for another train   Therefore  when in Manual Mode  use of the F4 window or the Dispatcher window to check on the  route availability is essential when running in an area with Al traffic     When in Manual Mode  deadlock prevention processing is switched off  This is because the  changes in the train   s route and direction which are likely to occur in Manual Mode could  jeopardise the stability of the deadlock processing  So care should be taken when using Manual  Mode in an area with Al traffic  specifically on single track sections     The only requirement to switch from Auto Mode to Manual Mode is that the train be at a standstill   The Ctrl M key toggles between Auto Mode and Manual Mode  When switching from Auto Mode  to Manual Mode  all signals already cleared will be reset  and new routes are cleared ahead of and    Page 125 of 206    behind the train for the maximum distance if possible  or up to the first signal     To switch back from Manual Mode to Auto Mode the front of the train must be on the path as  defined in the Activity Editor  If the path conta
275. ved games may not  be compatible with newer versions  as described here     Clicking the link    What s new     in the upper centre part of the main menu window will connect to a  website that summarizes the most recent changes to the OR program     5 3 Preliminary Selections  Firstly  under    Route     select the route on which you wish to play     If you check the    Logging    checkbox  Open Rails will generate a log file named OpenRailsLog txt  that resides on your desktop  This log file is very useful to document and investigate malfunctions     At every restart of the game  that is after clicking    Start    or    Server    or    Client     the log file is  cleared and a new one is generated     If the    Windowed    checkbox is checked  Open Rails will run in a window instead of full screen     If you wish to fine tune Open Rails for your system  click on the    Options    button  See the Chapter      Open Rails Options    which describes the extensive set of OR options  It is recommended that you  read this chapter     5 4 Gaming Modes  One of the plus points of Open Rails is the variety of gaming modes you can select     5 4 1 Traditional    Activity    and    Explore mode    modes  As a default you will find the radio button    Activity    selected in the start window  as above     This will allow you to run an activity or run in explore mode     If you select     Explore Route      first entry under    Activity       you will also have to select the consist   the 
276. ving in opposite direction   in that case  there should always be a misaligned switch  in the train   s path     e For  B   a signal will never clear when the train ahead is moving in the opposite  direction  nor will the Tab request be granted     e  A  B  the train   s defined path terminates short of the next signal  or there is a reversal  point short of the next signal  and there is at least one switch between this point and  the next signal    The control mode changes to Auto Node   End of Path   Note that if there is no switch between the terminating or reversal point and the next  signal the route is automatically extended to the next signal      A  B  the train has passed the last signal before the end of the track  or the train has  reached the end of track without encountering any signal  The control mode changes  to Auto Node   End of Track     Changes from Auto Node to Auto Signal and vice versa are automatic and cannot be influenced  by the player     10 3 2 Manual Mode   When it is required that a train move off its defined path  a player can switch his train to Manual  Mode  This will allow the player to set switches and request to clear signals off its path  However   there are a number of restrictions when running a train in Manual Mode     In Manual Mode  a route is cleared from the train in both directions  ahead of and behind the train   The route is cleared to a shorter distance as compared to Auto Mode  and is never cleared  automatically beyond the fir
277. w and the  tractive force falls to 10  of the previous value  By reducing the throttle setting adherence is  regained  This is called the simple adhesion model     Page 71 of 206    The second adhesion model  advanced adhesion model  is based on a simplified dynamic  adhesion theory  Very briefly  there is always some speed difference between the wheel speed of  the locomotive and the longitudinal train speed when the tractive force is different from zero  This  difference is called    wheel slip   wheel creep     The adhesion status is indicated in the HUD    Force  Information    view by the    Wheel Slip    parameter and as a warning in the general area of the HUD  view  For simplicity  only one axle model is computed  and animated   A tilting feature and the  independent axle adhesion model will be introduced in the future     The heart of the model is the slip characteristics  picture below                        0 km h             50 km h         150 km h                               av  km h        The    wheel creep    describes the stable area of the characteristics and is used in the most of the  operation time  When the tractive force reaches the actual maximum of the slip characteristics   force transition falls down and more power is used to speed up the wheels  so called    wheel slip        To avoid the loss of the tractive force  use the throttle in combination with sanding to return to the  stable area  wheel creep area   A possible sequence of the wheel sli
278. wheel  revolution     Page 82 of 206    As shown in the diagram below  IHP increases with speed  until it reaches a maximum value  This  value is determined by the cylinder   s ability to maintain an efficient throughput of steam  as well as  for the boiler   s ability to maintain sufficient steam generation to match the steam usage by the  cylinders     Mean  Effective  Pressure   Indicated  Horse  Power    Tractive  Effort       Locomotive     lt  Speed  gt   Hauling Capacity of Locomotives    Thus it can be seen that the hauling capacity is determined by the summation of the tractive effort  and the train resistance     Different locomotives were designed to produce different values of tractive effort  and therefore the  loads that they were able to haul would be determined by the track conditions  principally the ruling  gradient for the section  and the load or train weight  Therefore most railway companies and  locomotive manufacturers developed load tables for the different locomotives depending upon  their theoretical tractive efforts     The table below is a sample showing the hauling capacity of an American  4 4 0  locomotive from  the Baldwin Locomotive Company catalogue  listing the relative loads on level track and other  grades as the cylinder size  drive wheel diameter  and weight of the locomotive is varied     Lead ia Tons  2000 Pounds  of Cars and Lading      Weight tn    e 2 e   t Working Onder Wheel ase Ss  pf    a        ste Oe a Grade per Mile of  fie rh
279. which terrain is displayed  At higher distances  Distant Mountains will be displayed  see below   This parameter increases CPU and GPU load   Also  some routes are optimized for the standard MSTS maximum viewing distance  2000m      Page 20 of 206    6 3 9 Distant Mountains   Distant mountains are supported in a way that is compatible with MSTS  Distant mountains are  present in the route if it has a folder called LO_TILE  You may turn the feature on by checking the     Distant Mountains    checkbox  In addition to MSTS capability  you can select the viewing distance  of the distant mountains                       Open Rails      e oa   gt         a  bo uas             6 3 10 Viewing vertical FOV  This value defines the vertical angle of the world that is shown  Higher values correspond roughly  to a zoom out effect  The default is 45 degrees     6 3 11 World object density  This value can be set from 0 to 10  when 10 is selected  all objects defined in the route files are  displayed  Lower values do not display some categories of objects     6 3 12 Window size  This pair of values defines the size of the OR window  There are some preconfigured pairs of  values  however you may also manually enter a different size to be used     6 3 13 Ambient daylight brightness  With this slider you can set the daylight brightness     Page 21 of 206    6 4 Simulation Options  The majority of these options define train physics behavior     x      General   Audio   Video Simulation   Keyboard
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Samsung B2710 2" 116.12g Black    PLENÁRIO - Tribunal de Contas da União  SA-AK410LB-S  Model ACC34AC Signal Conditioner/Converter (AC)  Sikafloor®-220 W Conductive  仕様書 - 東京都農林水産振興財団  Customer Spotlight: Cessna Service Center and Mobile Service Unit  user manual - Philips SM30  CATVディジタル セット トップ ボックス リモコンの説明    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file